Limit Switches and Safety

Similar documents
Position and Safety Switches

SIRIUS Standard Position Switches Product Overview. sirius DETECTING

Control Circuit Components Push Button Units and Indicator Lights

SITRANS F flowmeters. SITRANS F O delta p - Primary differential pressure devices. Orifice plate with annular chambers. 4/358 Siemens FI

SIRIUS 3RU2 Thermal Overload Relays

Push Button Units and Indicator Lights

Overload Relays. SIRIUS 3RU2 Thermal Overload Relays 3RU2 up to 40 A for standard applications. 5/78 Siemens IC Overview

Protection Equipment

Terminal Blocks Product Catalog Terminal Block Supplement. Introduction. 8WH6 ipo Plug-In Terminals. 8WH6 ipo Installation Terminals

3RG4 BERO Inductive Proximity Switches

FL series position switches

SIGUARD Safety Systems Safety Integrated

Power Supplies. 11/2 Introduction

8WH6 ipo Installation Terminals

S: With magnet. Bore x stroke (basic type) Cushion P: pneumatic adjustable

Position switches FC series

Safety rope switches with reset for emergency stop

DATE: May 19, 2000 Service Instruction No. 1443E (Supersedes Service Instruction No. 1443D) Engineering Aspects are FAA Approved

Position Switches Series 8060/2

SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to 40 A Accessories Enclosures and front plates

3SE3 2 SIGUARD Position Switches

G3 UNIVERSAL GRIP CONFIGURATION GUIDE

7. Are you upgrading a complete engine from a TCM/ Bendix to a Slick system? If yes, purchase a complete Slick Ignition Upgrade Kit.

Protection Equipment. 5/2 Introduction

BETA Switching Switches and Light Indicators

8WH2 Spring-Loaded Terminals

Position switches FD series

D4B- N. Safety Interlock Switches. Safety Limit Switch. Specifications. Standards and EC Directives. Certified Standard Ratings D4BN

Position switches FR series

3SE3 1 SIGUARD Position Switches

3NP1 Fuse Switch Disconnectors up to 630 A

WELCOME TO THE WORLD OF COMPLETE AUTOMATION. Innovative MCS Starter Solutions. MCS Starters and the New Mounting System 141A

Compact cylinders series NYD Double acting with magnetic piston, ISO M5 to G1/8 Piston Ø 20 to 100 mm

Position Switches Series 8070/2

Safety Limit Switch

Thermal-magnetic Miniature Circuit Breaker 4230-T...

SERVICE INSTRUCTION. 652 Oliver Street Williamsport, PA U.S.A. Tel Fax

Industrial Controls. 8WN Signaling Columns.

Safety rope switch with reset for emergency stop

Safety switches with solenoid and separate actuator

DATE: February 13, 2019 Service Instruction No. 1037V (Supersedes Service Instruction No. 1037U) Engineering Aspects are FAA Approved

MOONEY INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION The Symbol of Performancet MOONEY SPECIAL LETTER Date:

New Generation 1LE1/1PC1

LR-LX-LK-LW Safety Switches with separate actuator

Ordering details. Approval. Classification. Global Properties :18:33h. Solenoid interlock / AZM 161

Safety switches with separate actuator

SERVICE INSTRUCTION. All Certified Lycoming direct drive engines. TIME OF COMPLIANCE: At owner s discretion.

8WH2 Spring-Loaded Terminals

On-off Valves MS-EE, Inch Series Overview

Safety switches with separate actuator

LK Position Switches TECHNICAL DATASHEET.

Miniaturized limit switches

AZM 161SK 12/12RKED/TU 024

Stars or starlets? Competitor overview switching devices. Only for internal use. sirius IN COMPARISON

Switches with manual reset

Metal limit switches are made of zinc alloy and have a degree of protection of IP67 and NEMA Type 4, 4X.

ED SERIES SAFETY LIMIT SWITCH

General Purpose Relays Industrial Relays. Power Relay RM 2/3/7

SIRIUS Shortform Catalogue 2017 siemens.com/sirius

General. Principles. 3-Trapped Key Switches. 11-Cat. No. Index. Logic. Power. Safety Switches Trapped Key Switches Overview

Limit switches. 7 Page 71. Presentation. OsiSense XC Basic Compact design, plastic, with reset knob, types XCNR and XCNTR. b XCNR.

3VT Kompaktleistungsschalter bis 630A

Limit switches. Metal. Limit Switches Metal casing, 30mm, 40mm & 60mm

LS Series Limit Switches. Short Form Catalogue AC1300 ABB

Limit Switch - Safety Type with pull button reset Plastic Body IP65 and Metal Body IP66

Interactive Catalog Replaces Catalog Pages

Item Code Description Quantity 3NA LV HRC FUSE LINK S00 80A 690AC 250DC 30 3NA3832 LV HRC FUSE LINK GL/GG S00 125A 500VAC 250VDC 0

SENTRON 3NP1 Fuse Switch Disconnectors up to 630 A

Limit Switches >> EKU1 series page 635 >> Limit switches for AS-Interface page 641 >> K series page 647 >> GW series page 653 >> O /P series page 659

~... se_rv_ic_e M_A_NU_AL_2_44_4._z1,~

VACUUM PRESSURE PUMPS INSTALLATION CAUTIONS AND INFORMATION READ AND FOLLOW CAREFULLY!

BC. Materials. Working temperature (Seals) Sectors: Industrial, Agricultural

Function Relays, Interfaces and Converters

Siemens AG Switch Disconnectors SENTRON. Configuration. Edition 10/2015. Manual. siemens.com/lowvoltage

LYCOMING CYLINDER PRICING

KNOCK CYLINDERS CONTENTS ACTUATORS GENERAL CATALOG. Caution KNOCK CYLINDERS

Safety rope switch without reset for simple stop

Safety switches for hinges

HS1E Series Full Size Solenoid Locking Switches

IEC CONTACTORS. Contacts Model List Model List AC3 UL 115 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V NO NC Number Price Number Price 3RT101

3VU13, 3VU16 Circuit-Breakers

Limit Switches - Limit Type Plastic Body IP65

SL1Series. Compact Horizontal Limit Switches

Technical data. Standards: IEC/EN ; EN ISO ; EN 1088; BG-GS-ET-19

Motors. IE changeover. IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors. Frame sizes 63 to 450 Power range 0.09 to 1250 kw Price List D 81.

Protection Equipment. Overload Relays. Reference Manual 04/2011. Industrial Controls. Answers for industry.

SIRIUS Innovations. Technical information for ring terminals SIRIUS. Answers for industry.

MS /27/2015. ABB contact for United States of America. General Information Extended Product Type: Categories

BETA Low-Voltage Circuit Protection

3RW Soft Starters. General data. 6/4 Siemens LV

Prewired position switches FF series

CAT. No. KS-570E. SCS Single Action Push Type. SCD Double Action Type. super. cylinder FUJIKURA RUBBER LTD.

ED SERIES SAFETY LIMIT SWITCH Description

FOOT SWITCHES

Safety switches with solenoid and separate actuator

46.3. Limit Switches. Contents. LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches. LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches

SIRIUS Configuration

D4BS. Safety-door Switch. Model Number Structure. Switch D4BS - S Operation Key D4BS - K. Ordering Information

Motor Starter Protectors

Standard Interlock Safety Switches

Transcription:

and Safety Introduction Overview 3SE5 23., 3SE5 21. 3SF1 2.4 3SE5 24., 3SF1 244 3SE5 13., 3SE5 11., 3SF1 114 3SE5 12., 3SF1 124 3SE5 16. 3SE5 232, 3SE5 212, 3SF1 2.4 3SE5 132, 3SE5 112, 3SF1 1.4 Position switches, standard Safety hinge switches Enclosure Plastic Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 31 68 33 5 53 33 4 78 38 56 78 38 56 1 38 31 68 33 4 78 38 Degree of protection Standards IEC 6947-5-1 Available Not available IP65, IP66/IP67 Mounting and operating points acc. to EN 547 IP66/IP67 IP66/IP67 IP66/IP67 IP66/IP67 IP65, IP66/IP67 Operating points acc. to EN 547 Mounting and operating points acc. to EN 541 Operating points acc. to EN 541 Operating points acc. to EN 547 Mounting and operating points acc. to EN 547 IP66/IP67 Mounting and operating points acc. to EN 541 Approvals CE, UL, CSA, CCC CE, UL, CSA, CCC CE, UL, CSA, CCC Contact blocks 2 slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 2 snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC Short stroke 1 NO + 1 NC With 2 2 mm contact gap 1 NO + 1 NC 3 slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC, 2 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 2 NC, 2 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 2 NC With make-before-break 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 3 snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 2 x (2 or 3 contacts) Special features LED status display Increased corrosion protection Explosion protection (ATEX) ASIsafe integrated Electrical specifications Insulation voltage U i 4 V 4 V 4 V Conventional thermal current I the 6 A/1 A (3-/2-pole) 6 A/1 A (3-/2-pole) 6 A/1 A (3-/2-pole) Connections Cable entry 1 M2 1.5 2 M2 1.5 1 M2 1.5 3 M2 1.5 1 M2 1.5 1 M2 1.5 1 M2 1.5 M12 connector socket, 4-, 5- or 8-pole Connector socket, 6-pole + PE Actuators Rounded plungers and roller plungers Roller and angular roller levers Spring rod Twist levers and rod actuators F ork lever Hinge switches Page Complete units 13/1, 13/27 13/19 13/15, 13/31 13/35 13/39 13/12 13/13 Modular system 13/13, 13/29 13/21 13/17, 13/33 13/37 13/4 Ambient temperature 4 C 13/23, 13/42 13/23 13/26, 13/43 13/43 13/43 ASIsafe on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line ATEX on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line on-line 13/4

Position and Safety Switches Limit Switches and Safety Introduction Introduction 3SE5 413, 3SE5 423 Compact design 3SE5 25 3SE5 232, 3SE5 242, 3SF1 2.4 Open-type 3SE5 112, 3SE5 122, 3SF1 1.4 Safety switches with separate actuator 3SE5 322, 3SE5 312, 3SF1 3.4 Safety switches with solenoid interlocking 3SE63 RFID safety switch Enclosure Plastic Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 3...., 4.... 3 48.5 2 31 68 33, 5 53 33 4 78 38, 56 78 38 54 185 44 25 91 22 Degree of protection IP66/IP67 IP1 or IP2 IP65, IP66/IP67 IP66/IP67 IP66/IP67 IP69K Standards IEC 6947-5-1 Mounting and operating points acc. to EN 547 Mounting acc. to EN 547 Mounting acc. to EN 541 EN 188 Category 4 acc. to ISO 13849-1, PL e acc. to ISO 13849-1, SIL 3 acc. to IEC 6158 Approvals CE, UL, CSA CE, TÜV, UL, CSA, CCC CE, TÜV, UL, CSA, CCC CE, TÜV Contact blocks 2 slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 2 snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC Short stroke With 2 2 mm contact gap 3 slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC With make-before-break 1 NO + 2 NC 3 snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 6 slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 2 (1 NO + 2 NC) Special features LED status display Increased corrosion protection Explosion protection (ATEX) ASIsafe integrated Electrical specifications Insulation voltage U i 4 V 4 V 4 V 4 V Conventional thermal current the 1 A 6 A 6 A 6 A Connections Cable entry 1 M2 1.5, 1 M2 1.5, 3 M2 1.5 2 M2 1.5 3 M2 1.5 M12 connector socket, 4-, 5- or 8-pole Molded cables AS-Interface Actuators Plungers, twist levers Separate actuators Page Complete units 13/46 13/47 13/82 13/85 13/95 Modular system 13/11 ASIsafe on-line on-line on-line ATEX on-line on-line 12 Available Not available Siemens IC 1 212 12/3 13/5

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches General Data Overview Position switches in the innovative SIRIUS 3SE5 series are modern in design, compact, modular and simple to connect. Complete units Popular versions of the position switches in standard enclosures are available as complete units. Position switches with plastic and metal enclosures Modular system The 3SE5 series features a new modular system comprising different sizes of the basic switch and an actuator which must be ordered separately. Thanks to the modular construction of the switch the user can select the right solution for his application from numerous versions and install it himself in a very short time. The short delivery times of the modules enable fast replacement and thus ensure high plant availability. Design Enclosure sizes All enclosure versions have an integrated chlorinated rubber diaphragm for high functional safety in cold and aggressive environments. The 3SE5 switches are available in five different enclosure sizes with 2 or 3 contacts and with the XL enclosure: Open-type position switch IP2 or IP1 Plastic enclosures according to EN 547 (31 mm wide), IP65, 1 cable entry Plastic enclosures (5 mm wide), IP66/IP67, 2 cable entries enclosures according to EN 547, (31 mm wide), IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry Plastic and metal enclosures according to EN 541 (4 mm wide), IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry enclosures (56 mm wide), IP66/IP67, 3 cable entries XL metal enclosures with 4 to 6 contacts, 56 mm wide, IP66/ IP67, 3 cable entriesenclosure versions Various basic switches can be selected for the 3SE5 series: With contact blocks with two or three contacts (screw terminals) designed as slow-action or snap-action contacts; the slow-action contacts also make-before-break Optional LED status display With mounted four or five-pole M12 connector socket (available for the wide enclosures as an accessory for selfassembly) With 6-pole connector socket + PE on the metal enclosures With increased corrosion protection Versions for operating temperature to -4 C enclosures for explosion protection (ATEX) AS-Interface version with integrated ASIsafe electronics for all enclosure designs Actuator variants All operating mechanisms can be rotate around the axis in increments of 22.5. The following actuator variants are available: Standard, rounded and roller plungers Roller and angular roller levers Spring rods Twist levers and rod actuators Fork levers with twist actuator The actuator rollers are available with various materials and diameters. Examples of selection options in the modular system Twist actuators for twist levers and rod actuators, with setting of switching to right, left or right/left (standard for all twist actuators except version for fork levers) 13/6

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches General Data Optional LED indicators LED indicators available for all enclosure sizes Mounting Easy plug-in method for fast replacement of the actuator head The enclosure versions can be supplied with an LED signaling indicator (1 green + 1 yellow). This is the first time that optical signaling equipment is also available for small standard enclosures according to EN 547. The LED signaling indicators are available in all common voltages (24 V DC and 23 V AC). Additional contacts Exchangeable two and three-pole switching blocks for all enclosure sizes (1) Open cover (2) Actuate locking lever (3) Replace the head (turnable by 16 x 22.5 ) (4) Lock and close the cover Fast connection method For plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm The three-pole switching block (2 NC, 1 NO) in snap-action and slow-action is regularly available for all enclosure forms. It offers more switching through redundant shutdowns (2 NC contacts) with simultaneous signaling (1 NO contact). The same installation space is required as for a two-pole switching block. Contact reliability The new contact blocks ensure an extremely high contact stability. This applies even when the devices are switching low voltages and currents, e. g. 1 ma at 5 V DC. These position switches can be wired quickly and easily as an added customer benefit. The connecting cable is first connected to the terminals of the contact block and then guided through a slit into the cable gland opening. The time saved through this new connection method is approx. 2 to 25 %. Positive opening q The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically, positively-driven and reliably by the plunger. This is referred to as "positive opening". 13/7

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches General Data Benefits The 3SE5 position switches differ from the previous series through the following new characteristics: The modular design of the product range allows a number of versions with a smaller number of bearing types for enclosures and operating mechanisms. All actuators can be turned around the axis in increments of 22.5 (see picture on page 13/6). Rounded and roller plungers according to EN 541 with 3 mm overtravel (total travel 9 mm) for greater tolerance when switching All enclosure sizes now also including the small enclosure 31 mm wide are optionally available with an LED signaling indicator (see picture on page 13/7). All enclosure versions have an integrated chlorinated rubber diaphragm (high functional safety in cold and aggressive environments). All contact blocks are replaceable (see page 13/49). The three-pole contact blocks are available for all enclosure sizes (see picture on page 13/7). Elements with 1 NO + 2 NC slow-action contacts with makebefore-break and 2 NO + 1 NC The short-stroke contact block 1 NO + 1 NC improves the precision of the switching operation through a reduced actuation path. The contact block with 1 NO + 1 NC snap-action contacts with 2 x 2 mm contact opening is suitable for simultaneous disconnection and signaling, particularly in the elevator industry NEW: XL enclosures for accommodating two 2- or 3-pole contact blocks The plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm has simple and fast wiring equipment which makes it possible to save from approx. 2 to 25 % of the time when connecting (see picture on page 13/7). The ASIsafe electric component is integrated for the versions with the AS-Interface connection (see on-line); an additional adapter is not required. Application With the standard position switches, mechanical positions of moved machine parts are converted into electrical signals. Through their modular and uniform design and large number of versions, the devices can meet practically all requirements in industry. Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. And many different actuator versions are available to match the mechanical configuration of the moved machined parts. Dimensions, fixing points and characteristics are largely in accordance with the EN 541 or EN 547 standards. The devices are suitable for use in any climate. Standards IEC 6947-5-1 or EN 6947-5-1. The protective measure of "total insulation" by the molded-plastic enclosure is guaranteed by the use of molded-plastic screwglands. Safety position switches For controls according to IEC 624-1 or EN 624-1 the devices can be used as a safety position switch. To secure position switches against changes in their position, keyed techniques must be employed on installation. Safety circuits IEC 6947-5-1 and EN 6947-5-1 require positive opening of the NC contacts, i.e. for the purposes of personal safety, the assured opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to the IEC standard 6947-5-1 with the symbol q. Category 2 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) can be attained with 3SE5 position switches with q, and category 3 or 4 when using an additional position switch, if the corresponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching devices from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges. The operating mechanisms (actuators) must also be connected to the enclosure by keyed techniques. The corresponding operating mechanisms are marked in the catalog with q. Contacts for each application Snap-action contacts: NC and NO contacts switch simultaneously regardless of the actuating speed (v min =.1 m/s) and contact erosion. Slow-action contacts: Difference in travel between "NC contact opens" and "NO contact closes"; the switching speed is the same as or proportional to the actuating speed (v min =.4 m/s). Slow-action contacts with make-before-break: e.g. suitable for adding a second function to a sequence control. Operating mechanisms for each application Standard, rounded and roller plungers Operation in direction of the plunger axis or in case of roller plunger with bar at right angles to the plunger axis The roller plunger is recommended for lateral actuation and relatively long overtravel. Roller and angular roller levers For actuators made of finely ground steel in the form of cams, straight-edges (approach angle 3 ) or cam disks Spring rod Can be used for undefined actuations and changing starting conditions Starting from any direction is possible Twist levers and rod actuators For a high starting speed (v = 1.5 m/s) Variety of starting options Insensitive to oil, grinding dust and coarse-grained material Adjustment of the lever in increments of 1. Can be adjusted with left or right switching Fork lever Switchable in two directions Latching actuator For reciprocating movements 13/8

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches General Data Options On the following pages you will find selection tables for complete units as well as components of the modular system. Complete units Modular system The difference between units is indicated in the selection and ordering data by gray backgrounds. Using the modular system you can assemble switch variants which are not available as complete units. Each complete unit can also be supplied as a module. A basic switch for the modular system comprises an enclosure with a contact block and a cover. Among the basic switches the following versions, for example, can be selected: Basic enclosure with teflon plunger Version with increased corrosion protection Version with 2 LEDs Version with M12 connector socket or 6-pole + PE Version with M12 connector socket and with 2 LEDs For the plastic enclosures with a width of 31 and 5 mm the basic switches are designed as complete units with rounded plunger (according to standard). Online configurator The online configurator helps you not only to select and order the right position switch but also to create complete product documentation. Product data sheets Dimensional drawings Operating travel diagrams CAD data in 2D and 3D model images Ordering data Product photos www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators Complete units Ordering example Required: Position switch according to EN 547 in a plastic enclosure Contact block with slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Angular roller lever, metal lever and plastic roller To be ordered: Version Complete units Order No. Complete units Enclosure width 31 mm Angular roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm Slow-action contacts 3SE5 232-BF1 1 NO + 1 NC Modular system Ordering example 1 Required: Position switch according to EN 547 in a plastic enclosure Contact block with slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Angular roller lever, metal lever and plastic roller To be ordered separately: Ordering example 2 Required: Position switch according to EN 547 in a plastic enclosure Contact block with slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Twist lever, high-grade steel lever and plastic roller To be ordered separately: Version Modular system Version Modular system Order No. Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm With teflon plunger Slow-action contacts 3SE5 232-BC5 1 NO + 1 NC Order No. Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm With teflon plunger Slow-action contacts 3SE5 232-BC5 1 NO + 1 NC Operating mechanisms + Twist actuators + Angular roller levers Twist actuators 3SE5 -AK lever, plastic roller 3SE5 -AF1 Twist levers High-grade steel lever, plastic roller 3SE5 -AA31 13/9

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry M2 1.5 1) Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 2) Enclosure width 31 mm Rounded plungers, type B, acc. to EN 547 With teflon plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-BC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-CC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-HC5 1 1 unit Rounded plungers With increased corrosion protection With 2 LEDs Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-FC5 1 1 unit Short stroke, integrated 3) Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-GC5 1 1 unit 2 2 mm contact gap Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 232-KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 232-LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 232-MC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-PC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-BC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-CC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-MC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-PC5-1CA 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 234-BC5-1AC4 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 234-HC5-1AC4 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 234-KC5-1AE 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 NC q A 3SE5 234-LC5-1AE 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 232-1KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 232-1LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 232-3KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 232-3LC5 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 234-1BC5-1AF3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 234-1CC5-1AF3 1 1 unit For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) A cable gland with seal must be used with the quick-connect method. 2) Popular versions. 3) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. 13/1 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry M2 1.5 1) Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 2) Enclosure width 31 mm Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 547 With plastic roller 1 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-BD3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-HD3 1 1 unit Integrated 3) Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-FD3 1 1 unit Roller plunger Short stroke, integrated 3) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KD3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 232-LD3 1 1 unit Actuator head rotated by 9 Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LD3-1AH 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 234-HD3-1AC4 1 1 unit Roller plungers with central fixing Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-HD1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KD1 1 1 unit Roller plunger with central fixing Roller lever Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 547 With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 232-BE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-HE1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LE1 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 234-HE1-1AC4 1 1 unit Angular roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 232-BF1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 232-HF1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KF1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LF1 1 1 unit 12 Angular roller lever For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) A cable gland with seal must be used with the quick-connect method. 2) Popular versions. 3) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. 12/14 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/11 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry M2 1.5 1) Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 2) Enclosure width 31 mm Spring rods Length 142.5 mm, with plastic plunger 5 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC A 3SE5 232-HR1 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 234-HR1-1AC4 1 1 unit Spring rod Twist lever Twist lever, adjustable length Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 547 With metal lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 232-BK21 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 232-HK21 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KK21 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LK21 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 234-HK21-1AC4 1 1 unit With metal lever 35 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-HK15 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-HK6 1 1 unit With metal lever and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 232-BK5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 232-HK5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC B 3SE5 232-LK5 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 234-HK5-1AC4 1 1 unit Rod actuators With aluminum rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 232-HK8 1 1 unit With plastic rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 232-HK82 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 234-HK82-1AC4 1 1 unit Rod actuator For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) A cable gland with seal must be used with the quick-connect method. 2) Popular versions. 3) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, page 13/13.. 13/12 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry M2 1.5 1) Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm (with rounded plunger 2) ) With teflon plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-BC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 232-CC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 232-HC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-FC5 1 1 unit Short stroke, integrated 3) Basic switch Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-GC5 1 1 unit 2 2 mm contact gap Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 232-KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 232-LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 232-MC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-PC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection 4) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-BC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-CC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LC5-1CA 1 1 unit With increased Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-MC5-1CA 1 1 unit corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-PC5-1CA 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 234-BC5-1AC4 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 3) 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 234-HC5-1AC4 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 234-KC5-1AE 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 NC q A 3SE5 234-LC5-1AE 1 1 unit 12 With M12 socket With 2 LEDs With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 232-1KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 232-1LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 232-3KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 232-3LC5 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 234-1BC5-1AF3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 234-1CC5-1AF3 1 1 unit With M12 socket and 2 LEDs For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) A cable gland with seal must be used with the quick-connect method. 2) For enclosures with widths of 31mm, the basic switch is a complete unit with rounded plungers. 3) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. 4) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. 12/16 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/13 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Version Diameter DT Modular system Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Roller plunger Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 547 Plastic rollers 1 q 3SE5 -AD3 1 1 unit High-grade steel rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD4 1 1 unit Roller plungers with central fixing Plastic rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD1 1 1 unit High-grade steel rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD11 1 1 unit PS* With central fixing Roller lever Angular roller lever Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 547 13 q 3SE5 -AE1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q 3SE5 -AE11 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AE12 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AE13 1 1 unit Angular roller levers 13 q 3SE5 -AF1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AF11 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q A 3SE5 -AF12 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AF13 1 1 unit Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only) Plastic plunger and high-grade steel spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) 3SE5 -AR1 1 1 unit Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 1 mm) 3SE5 -AR3 1 1 unit Length 242.5 mm (spring 15 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR4 1 1 unit High-grade steel plunger and spring: 7 Spring rod Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR2 1 1 unit Twist actuators Twist actuator Twist lever Twist lever, adjustable length Rod actuator Twist actuators, plastic (without lever) Switching right and/or left, adjustable q 3SE5 -AK 1 1 unit Levers for twist actuators Twist levers 21 mm, straight, type A acc. to EN 547 19 q 3SE5 -AA21 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA22 1 1 unit lever, roller with ball bearing 19 q B 3SE5 -AA23 1 1 unit 3 q B 3SE5 -AA25 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA31 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA32 1 1 unit Twist levers 3 mm, straight 1) 19 q B 3SE5 -AA24 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q 3SE5 -AA6 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 -AA61 1 1 unit 5 q B 3SE5 -AA67 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA68 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA63 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length 19 A 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA51 1 1 unit 3 B 3SE5 -AA55 1 1 unit 5 B 3SE5 -AA57 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 B 3SE5 -AA58 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 B 3SE5 -AA52 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA53 1 1 unit Rod actuators Aluminum rod, length 2 mm 6 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit Spring rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA81 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 2 mm 6 3SE5 -AA82 1 1 unit qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Can be clinch mounted (turned through 18, rear of lever). 13/14

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* 12 Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 4 mm Plain plungers With high-grade steel plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-BB1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-CB1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KB1 1 1 unit Plain plunger Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LB1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-PB1 1 1 unit Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 With plastic plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 132-BC3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 132-CC3 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KC3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LC3 1 1 unit Rounded plunger Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-PC3 1 1 unit Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 With plastic roller 13 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-BD5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 132-CD5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KD5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LD5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-PD5 1 1 unit Roller plunger Roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-BE5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 132-CE5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KE5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LE5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-PE5 1 1 unit Roller lever Angular roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-BF5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-CF5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LF5 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Spring rods Length 142.5 mm, with plastic plunger 5 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 132-CR1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC B 3SE5 132-LR1 1 1 unit Spring rod For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. 12/18 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/15 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 4 mm Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 541 With metal lever 27 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 132-BJ1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 132-CJ1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KJ1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LJ1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-PJ1 1 1 unit Twist lever Twist levers, adjustable length With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-CJ6 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LJ6 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length, with grid hole With metal lever and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC A 3SE5 132-CJ5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC B 3SE5 132-LJ5 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length Rod actuators, type D, acc. to EN 541 With aluminum rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 132-CJ8 1 1 unit With plastic rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC A 3SE5 132-CJ82 1 1 unit Rod actuator For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, page 13/17. 13/16 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Basic switches Enclosure width 4 mm With M2 1.5 connecting thread Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-BA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 132-CA 1 1 unit Gold-plated contacts q B 3SE5 132-CA-1AC1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KA 1 1 unit Basic switch Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-MA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-PA 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection 1) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-BA-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-CA-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KA-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LA-1CA 1 1 unit With increased Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-MA-1CA 1 1 unit corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-PA-1CA 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 134-BA-1AC4 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 134-CA-1AC4 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 134-KA-1AE 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 134-LA-1AE 1 1 unit With M12 socket With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q C 3SE5 132-1KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q C 3SE5 132-1LA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q C 3SE5 132-3KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q C 3SE5 132-3LA 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. 12 12/2 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/17 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Version Diameter DT Modular system Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Plain plunger Plunger Plain plungers High-grade steel plungers 1 q A 3SE5 -AB1 1 1 unit Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 Plastic plungers 1 q B 3SE5 -AC3 1 1 unit Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 Plastic plunger, plastic roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AD5 1 1 unit Plastic plunger, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AD6 1 1 unit Roller levers lever with plastic roller, plastic base 22 q B 3SE5 -AE5 1 1 unit PS* Roller lever Angular roller levers lever with plastic roller, plastic base 22 q B 3SE5 -AF5 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only) Plastic plunger and high-grade steel spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR1 1 1 unit Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 1 mm) B 3SE5 -AR3 1 1 unit Length 242.5 mm (spring 15 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR4 1 1 unit High-grade steel plunger and spring: 7 Spring rod Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR2 1 1 unit Twist actuators Twist actuator Twist lever Twist actuators, plastic (without lever) For twist levers and rod actuators, q B 3SE5 -AJ 1 1 unit switching right and/or left, adjustable Levers for twist actuators Twist levers, offset, type A acc. to EN 541 lever 27 mm, plastic roller 19 q 3SE5 -AA1 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 -AA2 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, roller with ball bearing 19 q B 3SE5 -AA3 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, 2 plastic rollers 19 q 3SE5 -AA4 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, plastic roller 3 q B 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, rubber roller 5 q 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever 27 mm, plastic roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA11 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever 27 mm, high-grade steel roller 19 q 3SE5 -AA12 1 1 unit lever 35 mm, plastic roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA15 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length Rod actuator 9 1 q B 3SE5 -AA24 1 1 unit Twist levers 3 mm, straight 1) 3 q B 3SE5 -AA26 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA61 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA68 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA63 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length 19 A 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA51 1 1 unit 3 B 3SE5 -AA55 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 B 3SE5 -AA58 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 B 3SE5 -AA52 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA53 1 1 unit Rod actuators, type D acc. to EN 541 Aluminum rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit Spring rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA81 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA82 1 1 unit qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Can be clinch mounted (turned through 18, rear of lever). 13/18 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 5 mm Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 2 (M2 1.5) Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 5 mm Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 5 mm Rounded plungers With teflon plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-BC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-CC5 1 1 unit Rounded plunger Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-HC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-FC5 1 1 unit Short stroke, integrated 2) Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-GC5 1 1 unit 2 2 mm contact gap Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 242-MC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 242-PC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-BC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-HC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-KC5-1CA 1 1 unit With increased Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-LC5-1CA 1 1 unit corrosion Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-MC5-1CA 1 1 unit protection Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-PC5-1CA 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 242-1KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 242-1LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 242-3KC5 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 242-3LC5 1 1 unit Roller plungers With plastic roller 1 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-BD3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-HD3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 242-LD3 1 1 unit Roller plunger 12 For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. 2) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. 12/22 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/19 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 5 mm 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 2 (M2 1.5) Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 5 mm Roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-BE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-HE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-LE1 1 1 unit Roller lever With M12 connector socket, 4-pole right (25 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 244-LE1-1AE 1 1 unit Twist levers With metal lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-BK21 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-HK21 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-LK21 1 1 unit Twist lever Twist levers, adjustable length With metal lever and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 242-HK5 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. 2) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, page 13/21. 13/2

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 5 mm Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 2 (M2 1.5) Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 5 mm Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Basic switches Enclosure width 5 mm (with rounded plunger 1) ) With teflon plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-BC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-CC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 242-HC5 1 1 unit Basic switches Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-FC5 1 1 unit Short stroke, integrated 2) Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-GC5 1 1 unit 2 2 mm contact gap Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 242-MC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 242-PC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection 3) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-BC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-HC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-KC5-1CA 1 1 unit With increased Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-LC5-1CA 1 1 unit corrosion protection Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 242-MC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-PC5-1CA 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 242-1KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 242-1LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 242-3KC5 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 242-3LC5 1 1 unit For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. 1) For enclosures with widths of 5 mm, the basic switch is a complete unit with rounded plungers. 2) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. 3) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever. 12 Version Diameter DT Modular system PS* Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 547 Plastic rollers 1 q A 3SE5 -AD3 1 1 unit High-grade steel rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD4 1 1 unit Roller plungers Roller plungers with central fixing Plastic rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD1 1 1 unit High-grade steel rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD11 1 1 unit With central fixing qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 12/24 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/21 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 5 mm Operating mechanisms Roller lever Angular roller lever Version Diameter DT Modular system Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 547 mm Order No. Price per 13 q A 3SE5 -AE1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AE11 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AE12 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AE13 1 1 unit Angular roller levers 13 q A 3SE5 -AF1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AF11 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q A 3SE5 -AF12 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AF13 1 1 unit Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only) Plastic plunger and high-grade steel spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR1 1 1 unit Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 1 mm) B 3SE5 -AR3 1 1 unit Length 242.5 mm (spring 15 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR4 1 1 unit High-grade steel plunger and spring: 7 Spring rod Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR2 1 1 unit Twist actuators Twist actuator Twist lever Twist actuators, plastic (without lever) Switching right and/or left, adjustable q A 3SE5 -AK 1 1 unit Levers for twist actuators Twist levers 21 mm, straight, type A acc. to EN 547 19 q A 3SE5 -AA21 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA22 1 1 unit lever, roller with ball bearing 19 q B 3SE5 -AA23 1 1 unit 3 q B 3SE5 -AA25 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA31 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA32 1 1 unit PS* Twist lever, adjustable length Rod actuator 9 1 q B 3SE5 -AA24 1 1 unit Twist levers 3 mm, straight 1) 3 q B 3SE5 -AA26 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA61 1 1 unit 5 q B 3SE5 -AA67 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA68 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA63 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length 19 A 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA51 1 1 unit 3 B 3SE5 -AA55 1 1 unit 5 B 3SE5 -AA57 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 B 3SE5 -AA58 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 B 3SE5 -AA52 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA53 1 1 unit Rod actuators Aluminum rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit Spring rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA81 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA82 1 1 unit qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Can be clinch mounted (turned through 18, rear of lever). 13/22 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 or IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* PG Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 31 mm Roller plungers with central fixing Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-CD1-1AJ 1 1 unit 41K Roller plunger with central fixing Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 547 With high-grade steel lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-CK31-1AJ 1 1 unit 41K Twist lever Twist levers, adjustable length With high-grade steel lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 232-CK62-1AJ 1 1 unit 41K Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LK62-1AJ 1 1 unit 41K 12 Twist lever, adjustable length Complete units 1) Enclosure width 5 mm Twist levers With metal lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-HK21-1AJ 1 1 unit 41K Twist levers, adjustable length With high-grade steel lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-HK62-1AJ 1 1 unit 41K Twist lever, adjustable length For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Popular versions. 2) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, see page 13/24. 12/26 Siemens IC 1 212 13/23 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 or IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm (with rounded plunger 1) ) With teflon plunger Order No. Price per Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-CC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-KC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Basic switch Basic switches Enclosure width 5 mm (with rounded plunger 1) ) With teflon plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-BC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts, integrated 2) 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 242-HC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Basic switch For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) For enclosures with widths of 31 and 5 mm, the basic switch is a complete unit with rounded plungers. 2) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. 13/24 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Version Diameter DT Modular system PS* Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 547 Plastic rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD3-1AJ 1 1 unit Roller plunger Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 547 13 q B 3SE5 -AE1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AE12-1AJ 1 1 unit Roller lever Angular roller levers 13 q B 3SE5 -AF1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AF12-1AJ 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Twist actuators Twist actuators, plastic (without lever) Switching right and/or left, adjustable q B 3SE5 -AK-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist actuator Twist lever Levers for twist actuators Twist levers straight, 21 mm, type A acc. to EN 547 19 q B 3SE5 -AA21-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA31-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 12 12/28 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/25 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Basic switches Enclosure width 4 mm With M2 1.5 connecting thread Order No. Price per Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 132-CA-1AJ 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-KA-1AJ 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LA-1AJ 1 1 unit Basic switch For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. Operating mechanisms Version Diameter DT Modular system mm Order No. Price per Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 Plastic plunger 1 q B 3SE5 -AC3-1AJ 1 1 unit PS* Rounded plunger Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 Plastic plunger, plastic roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AD5-1AJ 1 1 unit Roller plunger Roller levers lever with plastic roller, plastic base 22 q B 3SE5 -AE5-1AJ 1 1 unit Roller lever Twist actuators Twist actuators, plastic (without lever) For twist levers and rod actuators, switching right and/or left, adjustable q B 3SE5 -AJ-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist actuator Twist levers Levers for twist actuators Twist lever, type A acc. to EN 541 19 q B 3SE5 -AA1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA11-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 13/26 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* 12 Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 31 mm Rounded plungers, type B, acc. to EN 547 With plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-BC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-CC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 212-KC5 1 1 unit Rounded plunger Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 212-LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 212-MC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-PC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-BC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-CC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LC5-1CA 1 1 unit With increased Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-MC5-1CA 1 1 unit corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-PC5-1CA 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 214-BC5-1AC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 214-CC5-1AC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 214-KC5-1AE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 214-LC5-1AE1 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 212-1KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q A 3SE5 212-1LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 212-3KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 212-3LC5 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 214-1BC5-1AF3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 214-1CC5-1AF3 1 1 unit Plain plungers With high-grade steel plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-BB1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-CB1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KB1 1 1 unit Plain plunger Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LB1 1 1 unit Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 547 With plastic roller 1 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-BD3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-CD3 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 212-KD3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LD3 1 1 unit Roller plunger For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. 12/3 Siemens IC 1 212 13/27 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Complete units 1) Enclosure width 31 mm Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 547 With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm Roller lever Order No. Price per Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-BE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-CE1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LE1 1 1 unit Angular roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-BF1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-CF1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KF1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LF1 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 547 With metal lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-BK21 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-CK21 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KK21 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LK21 1 1 unit Twist lever Twist lever, adjustable length Twist levers, adjustable length With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-CK6 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KK6 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LK6 1 1 unit With metal lever and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC A 3SE5 212-BK5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 212-CK5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC B 3SE5 212-LK5 1 1 unit For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, see page 13/29. 13/28 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm (with rounded plunger 1) ) With plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-BC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-CC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 212-KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 212-LC5 1 1 unit Basic switch Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 212-MC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-PC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection 2) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-BC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-CC5-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KC5-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LC5-1CA 1 1 unit With increased Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-MC5-1CA 1 1 unit corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-PC5-1CA 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 214-BC5-1AC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 214-CC5-1AC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 214-KC5-1AE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 214-LC5-1AE1 1 1 unit With M12 socket With 2 LEDs With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 212-1KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q A 3SE5 212-1LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 212-3KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 212-3LC5 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 214-1BC5-1AF3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 214-1CC5-1AF3 1 1 unit 12 With M12 socket and 2 LEDs For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) For enclosures with widths of 31mm, the basic switch is a complete unit with rounded plungers. 2) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. Version Diameter DT Modular system PS* Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Plain plungers High-grade steel plungers 1 q A 3SE5 -AB1 1 1 unit Plain plunger Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 547 Plastic rollers 1 q A 3SE5 -AD3 1 1 unit High-grade steel rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD4 1 1 unit Roller plunger qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 12/32 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/29 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Version Diameter DT Modular system Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Roller plungers with central fixing Plastic rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD1 1 1 unit High-grade steel rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD11 1 1 unit PS* With central fixing Roller lever Angular roller lever Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 547 13 q A 3SE5 -AE1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AE11 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AE12 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AE13 1 1 unit Angular roller levers 13 q A 3SE5 -AF1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AF11 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q A 3SE5 -AF12 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 13 q B 3SE5 -AF13 1 1 unit Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only) Plastic plunger and high-grade steel spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR1 1 1 unit Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 1 mm) B 3SE5 -AR3 1 1 unit Length 242.5 mm (spring 15 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR4 1 1 unit High-grade steel plunger and spring: 7 Spring rod Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR2 1 1 unit Twist actuators Twist actuator Twist levers Twist lever, adjustable length Rod actuator Twist actuators, plastic (without lever) Switching right and/or left, adjustable q A 3SE5 -AK 1 1 unit Levers for twist actuators Twist levers, straight, type A acc. to EN 547 lever 21 mm, plastic roller 19 q A 3SE5 -AA21 1 1 unit lever 21 mm, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA22 1 1 unit lever 21 mm, roller with ball bearing 19 q B 3SE5 -AA23 1 1 unit lever 21 mm, plastic roller 3 q B 3SE5 -AA25 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever 21 mm, plastic roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA31 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever 21 mm, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA32 1 1 unit 9 1 q B 3SE5 -AA24 1 1 unit Twist levers 3 mm, straight 1) 3 q B 3SE5 -AA26 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA61 1 1 unit 5 q B 3SE5 -AA67 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA68 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA63 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length 19 A 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA51 1 1 unit 3 B 3SE5 -AA55 1 1 unit 5 B 3SE5 -AA57 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 B 3SE5 -AA58 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 B 3SE5 -AA52 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA53 1 1 unit Rod actuators, type D acc. to EN 541 Aluminum rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit Spring rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA81 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA82 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 33 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA83 1 1 unit qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Can be clinch mounted (turned through 18, rear of lever). 13/3 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 4 mm Plain plungers With high-grade steel plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 112-BB1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 112-CB1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 112-KB1 1 1 unit Plain plunger Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LB1 1 1 unit Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 With high-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-BC2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CC2 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-KC2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LC2 1 1 unit Rounded plunger Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 With high-grade steel roller 13 mm, with 3 mm overtravel Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-BD2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CD2 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 112-KD2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 112-LD2 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Roller plunger Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 114-1CD2-1AF3 1 1 unit Roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-BE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CE1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-KE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LE1 1 1 unit 12 Roller lever Angular roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-BF1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CF1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LF1 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Spring rods Length 142.5 mm, with plastic plunger 5 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 112-CR1 1 1 unit Spring rod For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. Industrial Controls 12/34 Catalog Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/31 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Complete units 1) Enclosure width 4 mm Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 541 With metal lever 27 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Twist lever Order No. Price per Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-BH1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CH1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 112-KH1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LH1 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 114-CH1-1AC5 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 114-1CH1-1AF3 1 1 unit With metal lever 27 mm and high-grade steel roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-BH2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CH2 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 114-1CH2-1AF3 1 1 unit With metal lever 3 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 112-CH24 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-BH6 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CH6 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LH6 1 1 unit length, with grid hole With metal lever and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 112-BH5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 112-CH5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC B 3SE5 112-LH5 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 8-pole (3 V, 2 A) and 2 LEDs Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC B 3SE5 114-1LH5-1AD4 1 1 unit With metal lever and high-grade steel roller 19 mm Twist lever, adjustable length Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 112-CH51 1 1 unit Fork levers, latching With metal lever and 2 plastic rollers 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-CT11 1 1 unit Fork lever Rod actuators, type D, acc. to EN 541 With aluminum rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 112-CH8 1 1 unit With plastic rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 112-CH82 1 1 unit Rod actuator For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, page 13/33. 13/32 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* 12 Order No. Price per Basic switches Enclosure width 4 mm With M2 1.5 connecting thread Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-BA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-CA 1 1 unit Gold-plated contacts q B 3SE5 112-CA-1AC1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 112-KA 1 1 unit Basic switch Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 112-LA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 112-MA 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection With M12 socket With plug, 6-pole + PE With 2 LEDs With M12 socket and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 112-PA 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection 1) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-BA-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-CA-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-KA-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LA-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-MA-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-PA-1CA 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 114-BA-1AC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 114-CA-1AC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 114-KA-1AE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 NC q B 3SE5 114-LA-1AE1 1 1 unit With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (25 V, 1 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 115-KA-1AD1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 115-LA-1AD1 1 1 unit With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (25 V, 1 A) and quick-release device Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 115-CA-1AD 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 112-1KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SE5 112-1LA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 112-3KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 112-3LA 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 114-1BA-1AF3 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 114-1CA-1AF3 1 1 unit With M12 connector socket, 8-pole (3 V, 2 A) and 2 LEDs Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 114-1LA-1AD4 1 1 unit With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (1 A), and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 115-1BA-1AF2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 115-1CA-1AF2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 115-1LA-1AD2 1 1 unit With socket, 6-pole + PE, and 2 LEDs For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever. Note: Selection aid, see page 13/9. 12/36 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/33 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Version Diameter DT Modular system PS* Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Plain plungers High-grade steel plungers 1 q A 3SE5 -AB1 1 1 unit Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel 1 q 3SE5 -AC2 1 1 unit Plunger Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 High-grade steel roller, with 3 mm overtravel 13 q 3SE5 -AD2 1 1 unit Roller levers 22 q 3SE5 -AE1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q 3SE5 -AE2 1 1 unit High-grade steel 22 q B 3SE5 -AE3 1 1 unit Roller lever High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AE4 1 1 unit Angular roller levers 22 q 3SE5 -AF1 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Spring rod Twist actuators Twist actuator Twist levers lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AF2 1 1 unit High-grade steel 22 q B 3SE5 -AF3 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AF4 1 1 unit Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only) Plastic plunger and high-grade steel spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR1 1 1 unit Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 1 mm) B 3SE5 -AR3 1 1 unit Length 242.5 mm (spring 15 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR4 1 1 unit High-grade steel plunger and spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR2 1 1 unit Twist actuators, metal (without lever) For twist levers and rod actuators, switching right and/or left, adjustable q A 3SE5 -AH 1 1 unit For fork levers, latching q 3SE5 -AT1 1 1 unit Levers for twist actuators Twist levers, offset, type A acc. to EN 541 lever 27 mm, plastic roller 19 q A 3SE5 -AA1 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, high-grade steel roller 19 q A 3SE5 -AA2 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, roller with ball bearing 19 q B 3SE5 -AA3 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AA4 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, plastic roller 3 q B 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever 27 mm, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever 27 mm, plastic roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA11 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever 27 mm, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA12 1 1 unit lever 35 mm, plastic roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA15 1 1 unit 9 1 q B 3SE5 -AA24 1 1 unit Twist levers 3 mm, straight 1) Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole Twist lever, adjustable 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6 1 1 unit length lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA61 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA68 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA63 1 1 unit Fork lever Rod actuator Twist levers, adjustable length 19 A 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA51 1 1 unit 3 B 3SE5 -AA55 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 B 3SE5 -AA58 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 B 3SE5 -AA52 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA53 1 1 unit Fork levers (for switches with snap-action contacts only) 2 metal levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q 3SE5 -AT1 1 1 unit 2 metal levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT2 1 1 unit 2 high-grade steel levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT3 1 1 unit Rod actuators, type D acc. to EN 541 Aluminum rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit Spring rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA81 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA82 1 1 unit qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Can be clinch mounted (turned through 18, rear of lever). 13/34 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 3 (M2 1.5) Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 56 mm Plain plungers With high-grade steel plunger Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-BB1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-CB1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-KB1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LB1 1 1 unit Plain plunger Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-PB1 1 1 unit Rounded plungers With high-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-BC2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-CC2 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-KC2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LC2 1 1 unit Rounded plunger Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-PC2 1 1 unit Roller plungers With high-grade steel roller 13 mm, with 3 mm overtravel Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-BD2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-CD2 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 122-KD2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LD2 1 1 unit 12 Roller plunger Roller lever Roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-BE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-CE1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 122-KE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LE1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-PE1 1 1 unit With metal lever and high-grade steel roller 22 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-CE2 1 1 unit Angular roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-BF1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-CF1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-PF1 1 1 unit Angular roller lever For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. 12/38 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/35 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 3 (M2 1.5) Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Complete units 1) Enclosure width 56 mm Spring rods Length 142.5 mm, with plastic plunger 5 mm Order No. Price per Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 122-CR1 1 1 unit Spring rod Twist lever Twist lever, adjustable length Twist levers With metal lever 27 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-BH1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 122-CH1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-KH1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LH1 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-PH1 1 1 unit With metal lever 27 mm and high-grade steel roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-CH2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LH2 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-BH6 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-CH6 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LH6 1 1 unit With metal lever and plastic roller 19 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 122-BH5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 122-CH5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC B 3SE5 122-LH5 1 1 unit Fork levers, latching With metal lever and 2 plastic rollers 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-CT11 1 1 unit Fork lever Rod actuators With aluminum rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 122-CH8 1 1 unit With plastic rod, length 2 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC B 3SE5 122-CH82 1 1 unit Rod actuator For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, page 13/37. 13/36 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 3 (M2 1.5) Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Basic switches Enclosure width 56 mm With 3 x M2 x 1.5 connecting thread Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-BA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 122-LA 1 1 unit Basic switch Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 122-MA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 122-PA 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection 1) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-BA-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-CA-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-KA-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LA-1CA 1 1 unit With increased Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-MA-1CA 1 1 unit corrosion protection Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-PA-1CA 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 122-1KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 122-1LA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 122-3KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 122-3LA 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. 12 Version Diameter DT Modular system PS* Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Plain plungers High-grade steel plungers 1 q A 3SE5 -AB1 1 1 unit Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel 1 q B 3SE5 -AC2 1 1 unit Rounded plunger, roller plunger Roller lever Angular roller lever Spring rod Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 High-grade steel roller, with 3 mm overtravel 13 q B 3SE5 -AD2 1 1 unit Roller levers 22 q A 3SE5 -AE1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AE2 1 1 unit High-grade steel 22 q B 3SE5 -AE3 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AE4 1 1 unit Angular roller levers 22 q A 3SE5 -AF1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AF2 1 1 unit High-grade steel 22 q B 3SE5 -AF3 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AF4 1 1 unit Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only) Plastic plunger and high-grade steel spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR1 1 1 unit Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 1 mm) B 3SE5 -AR3 1 1 unit Length 242.5 mm (spring 15 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR4 1 1 unit High-grade steel plunger and spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR2 1 1 unit 12/4 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/37 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm Twist actuators Twist actuator Twist lever Version Diameter DT Modular system mm Order No. Price per Twist actuators, metal (without lever) For twist levers and rod actuators, switching right and/or left, adjustable q A 3SE5 -AH 1 1 unit For fork levers, latching q B 3SE5 -AT1 1 1 unit Levers for twist actuators Twist levers 27 mm, offset, type A acc. to EN 541 19 q A 3SE5 -AA1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q A 3SE5 -AA2 1 1 unit lever, roller with ball bearing 19 q B 3SE5 -AA3 1 1 unit lever, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AA4 1 1 unit 3 q B 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit 5 q B 3SE5 -AA7 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA11 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA12 1 1 unit Twist levers 35 mm, offset 19 q B 3SE5 -AA15 1 1 unit PS* Twist lever, adjustable length Fork lever Twist levers 3 mm, straight 1) 19 q B 3SE5 -AA24 1 1 unit 3 q B 3SE5 -AA26 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA61 1 1 unit 5 q B 3SE5 -AA67 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA68 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA63 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length 19 A 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA51 1 1 unit 3 B 3SE5 -AA55 1 1 unit 5 B 3SE5 -AA57 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 B 3SE5 -AA58 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 B 3SE5 -AA52 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA53 1 1 unit Fork levers (for switches with snap-action contacts only) 2 metal levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT1 1 1 unit 2 metal levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT2 1 1 unit 2 high-grade steel levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT3 1 1 unit 2 high-grade steel levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT4 1 1 unit Rod actuators, type D acc. to EN 541 Aluminum rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit Spring rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA81 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA82 1 1 unit Rod actuator qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Can be clinch mounted (turned through 18, rear of lever). 13/38 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm, XL Selection and ordering data Complete units 4 or 5 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 3 (M2 1.5) Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm, XL Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units 1) Enclosure width 56 mm, XL Plain plungers With high-grade steel plunger Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-CB1 1 1 unit Plain plunger Rounded plungers With high-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC and q B 3SE5 162-EC2 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 1 NO +2 NC Rounded plunger 2 mm travel difference Roller plungers With high-grade steel roller 13 mm, with 3 mm overtravel Slow-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-BD2 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q A 3SE5 162-CD2 1 1 unit Roller plunger Roller lever Roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Slow-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-BE1 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q A 3SE5 162-CE1 1 1 unit With metal lever and high-grade steel roller 22 mm Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-CE2 1 1 unit Angular roller levers With metal lever and plastic roller 22 mm Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-CF1 1 1 unit 12 Angular roller lever Twist levers With metal lever 27 mm and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q A 3SE5 162-CH1 1 1 unit Twist lever For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Popular versions. Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see Modular System, page 13/4. 12/42 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/39 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm, XL Modular system 4 or 6 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 3 (M2 1.5) Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Basic switches Enclosure width 56 mm, XL Basic switch With 3 x M2 x 1.5 connecting thread For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever. Order No. Price per Slow-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q 3SE5 162-BA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q A 3SE5 162-CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 2 (1 NO + 2 NC) q A 3SE5 162-DA 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection 1) Slow-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-BA-1CA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-CA-1CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with makebefore-break 2 (1 NO + 2 NC) q B 3SE5 162-DA-1CA 1 1 unit Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. Version Diameter DT Modular system PS* Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Plain plungers High-grade steel plungers 1 q A 3SE5 -AB1 1 1 unit Plain plunger Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel 1 q B 3SE5 -AC2 1 1 unit Rounded plunger Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 High-grade steel roller, with 3 mm overtravel 13 q B 3SE5 -AD2 1 1 unit Roller plunger Roller lever Angular roller lever Spring rod Roller levers 22 q A 3SE5 -AE1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AE2 1 1 unit High-grade steel 22 q B 3SE5 -AE3 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AE4 1 1 unit Angular roller levers 22 q A 3SE5 -AF1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AF2 1 1 unit High-grade steel 22 q B 3SE5 -AF3 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 22 q B 3SE5 -AF4 1 1 unit Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only) Plastic plunger and high-grade steel spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR1 1 1 unit Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 1 mm) B 3SE5 -AR3 1 1 unit Length 242.5 mm (spring 15 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR4 1 1 unit High-grade steel plunger and spring: 7 Length 142.5 mm (spring 5 mm, plunger 5 mm) B 3SE5 -AR2 1 1 unit qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 13/4 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches enclosures Enclosure width 56 mm, XL Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches enclosures Enclosure width 56mm and 56mm, XL Version Diameter DT Modular system PS* Order No. Price per mm Twist actuators Twist actuators, metal (without lever) For twist levers and rod actuators, switching right and/or left, adjustable q A 3SE5 -AH 1 1 unit For fork levers, latching q B 3SE5 -AT1 1 1 unit Twist actuator Levers for twist actuators Twist levers 27 mm, offset, type A acc. to EN 541 19 q A 3SE5 -AA1 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q A 3SE5 -AA2 1 1 unit lever, roller with ball bearing 19 q B 3SE5 -AA3 1 1 unit Twist lever lever, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AA4 1 1 unit 3 q B 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit 5 q B 3SE5 -AA7 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA11 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA12 1 1 unit Twist levers 35 mm, offset 19 q B 3SE5 -AA15 1 1 unit 12 9 1 q B 3SE5 -AA24 1 1 unit Twist levers 3 mm, straight 1) 3 q B 3SE5 -AA26 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA61 1 1 unit 5 q B 3SE5 -AA67 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 q B 3SE5 -AA68 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 q B 3SE5 -AA63 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length Twist lever, adjustable length 19 A 3SE5 -AA5 1 1 unit lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA51 1 1 unit 3 B 3SE5 -AA55 1 1 unit 5 B 3SE5 -AA57 1 1 unit lever, rubber roller 5 B 3SE5 -AA58 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 B 3SE5 -AA52 1 1 unit High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller 19 B 3SE5 -AA53 1 1 unit Fork levers (for switches with snap-action contacts only) 2 metal levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT1 1 1 unit 2 metal levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT2 1 1 unit 2 high-grade steel levers, 2 plastic rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT3 1 1 unit Fork lever 2 high-grade steel levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19 q B 3SE5 -AT4 1 1 unit Rod actuators, type D acc. to EN 541 Aluminum rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA8 1 1 unit Spring rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA81 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 2 mm 6 B 3SE5 -AA82 1 1 unit Plastic rod, length 33 mm 6 B 2) 3SE5 -AA83 1 1 unit Rod actuator qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) Can be clinch mounted (turned through 18, rear of lever). 2) For Enclosure width 56mm XL only. 12/44 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/41 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Selection and ordering data Modular system 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm (with rounded plunger 1) ) With plunger Order No. Price per Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 212-CC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-KC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LC5-1AJ 1 1 unit Basic switch For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K, or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 1) For enclosures with widths of 31 mm, the basic switch is a complete unit with rounded plungers. Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. Version Diameter DT Modular system Order No. Price per mm Operating mechanisms Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 547 Plastic rollers 1 q B 3SE5 -AD3-1AJ 1 1 unit PS* Roller plunger Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 547 13 q B 3SE5 -AE1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AE12-1AJ 1 1 unit Roller lever Angular roller levers 13 q B 3SE5 -AF1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AF12-1AJ 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Twist actuators Twist actuators, plastic (without lever) Switching right and/or left, adjustable q B 3SE5 -AK-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist actuator Twist lever Levers for twist actuators Twist lever straight, 21 mm, type A acc. to EN 547 19 q B 3SE5 -AA21-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA31-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 13/42 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Version Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Complete units Enclosure width 4 mm Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 With high-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-CC2-1AJ 1 1 unit Rounded plunger Twist levers, adjustable length With high-grade steel lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-CH62-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. Modular system 2, 3 or 4 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Note: If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see "Modular System". Version Contacts LEDs DT Modular system Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Basic switches Enclosure width 4 mm With M2 1.5 connecting thread Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 112-CA-1AJ 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-KA-1AJ 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LA-1AJ 1 1 unit 12 Basic switch Basic switches Enclosure width 56 mm With 3 x M2 x 1.5 connecting thread Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 122-CA-1AJ 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-KA-1AJ 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 122-LA-1AJ 1 1 unit Basic switch Basic switches Enclosure width 56 mm, XL With 3 x M2 x 1.5 connecting thread Slow-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-BA-1AJ 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 2 (1 NO + 1 NC) q B 3SE5 162-CA-1AJ 1 1 unit Basic switch For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K or positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. Industrial Controls 12/46 Catalog Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW Note: Selection aid see page 13/9. 13/43 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Ambient temperature to 4 C Operating mechanisms Version Diameter DT Modular system Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 541 mm Order No. Price per High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel 1 q B 3SE5 -AC2-1AJ 1 1 unit PS* Rounded plunger Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 541 High-grade steel roller, with 3 mm overtravel 1 q B 3SE5 -AD2-1AJ 1 1 unit Roller plunger Roller levers 13 q B 3SE5 -AE1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AE3-1AJ 1 1 unit Roller lever Angular roller levers 13 q B 3SE5 -AF1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 13 q B 3SE5 -AF3-1AJ 1 1 unit Angular roller lever Twist actuators Twist actuators, metal (without lever) Switching right and/or left, adjustable q B 3SE5 -AH-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist actuator Levers for twist actuators Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 541 19 q B 3SE5 -AA1-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA11-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist lever Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole 19 q B 3SE5 -AA6-1AJ 1 1 unit High-grade steel 19 q B 3SE5 -AA62-1AJ 1 1 unit Twist lever, adjustable length qpositively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits. 13/44 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Compact design Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Compact design Overview Benefits Very compact yet with the same rating as the 3SE51 standard switches, for notable space savings in confined installation conditions Various actuator versions available Actuator heads rotatable in increments of 9 Time is saved when mounting the fully assembled unit With metal enclosure of degree of protection IP67, ideal for use in rough industrial environments Insensitive to electromagnetic interference 12 Compact design in width 3 mm Particularly in harsh environments or on equipment with limited space, the small 3SE5 4 position switches in compact design with a depth of 16 mm and a weight of only 8 g (without cable) are ideal. Above all the versions with molded cable can be mounted in the most confined places. 3SE5 4 compact position switches are available in two different widths as complete units: The 3SE5 413 series complies with the EU standard and features a 3 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a distance of 2 mm. The 3SE5 423 series meets the requirements of the US market and features a 4 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a spacing of 25 mm. Both the enclosure and the twist actuator are made of metal and comply with the high IP67 degree of protection. Following actuators are available: Rounded plungers Rounded plungers with central fixing Rounded plungers with external seal Roller plungers Roller plunger with central fixing Twist levers The contact block is designed with snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC. The NC contact complies with the requirements for positive opening acc. to IEC 6947-5-1. Use in safety circuits up to Category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1. Connection: With molded cable, 2 m or 5 m long With M12 connector socket 12/48 Siemens IC 1 212 13/45

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Compact design Selection and ordering data 2 snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Degree of protection IP67 With connecting cable or M12 connector socket Operating mechanism Enclosure width DT Configurator Complete units Enclosure width 3 or 4 mm Rounded plunger Rounded plungers Standard mounting mm Order No. Price per - With 2 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q A 3SE5 413-CC2-1EA2 1 1 unit 4 q 3SE5 423-CC2-1EA2 1 1 unit - With 5 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q B 3SE5 413-CC2-1EA5 1 1 unit - With M12 connector socket 3 q A 3SE5 413-CC2-1EB1 1 1 unit With central fixing M12 x 1 4 q A 3SE5 423-CC2-1EB1 1 1 unit - With 2 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q 3SE5 413-CC21-1EA2 1 1 unit 4 q A 3SE5 423-CC21-1EA2 1 1 unit PS* With central fixing With external seal - With 2 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q A 3SE5 413-CC22-1EA2 1 1 unit 4 q A 3SE5 423-CC22-1EA2 1 1 unit With external seal Roller plunger Roller plungers Standard mounting - With 2 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q 3SE5 413-CD2-1EA2 1 1 unit 4 q 3SE5 423-CD2-1EA2 1 1 unit - With 5 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q B 3SE5 413-CD2-1EA5 1 1 unit - With M12 connector socket 3 q A 3SE5 413-CD2-1EB1 1 1 unit 4 q A 3SE5 423-CD2-1EB1 1 1 unit With central fixing M12 x 1 - With 2 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q A 3SE5 413-CD21-1EA2 1 1 unit 4 q A 3SE5 423-CD21-1EA2 1 1 unit Actuator head rotated 9 - With 2 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q A 3SE5 413-CD23-1EA2 1 1 unit With plug With plug, enclosure width 4 mm Twist levers Standard mounting - With 2 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q 3SE5 413-CN2-1EA2 1 1 unit 4 q A 3SE5 423-CN2-1EA2 1 1 unit - With 5 m cable 5 x.75 mm 2 3 q A 3SE5 413-CN2-1EA5 1 1 unit - With M12 connector socket 3 q A 3SE5 413-CN2-1EB1 1 1 unit 4 q A 3SE5 423-CN2-1EB1 1 1 unit Twist lever For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 13/46 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches Limit Switches Open-Type SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, open-type design Overview 3SE5, open-type design Their compact design makes these switches particularly suitable for use in confined conditions. The fixing dimensions and operating points are according to EN 547. The switches are equipped with two or three contacts in slow-action or snap-action versions. The stroke is 6 mm. The empty enclosure can be equipped with all switch block versions (see page 13/49). Open-type design Selection and ordering data 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP2 (2 contacts), IP1 (3 contacts) Version Contacts DT Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 3 mm With teflon plunger, Ø 6 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 25-BC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 25-CC5 1 1 unit 2 contacts Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 25-KC5 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE5 25-LC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with make-before-break 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 25-MC5 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 25-PC5 1 1 unit 12 3 contacts Empty enclosures without contact block q B 3SE5 25-AC5 1 1 unit Empty enclosures Contact blocks with 2 contacts for open-type design 1) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 5-BA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 2 contacts - Standard q B 3SE5 5-CA 1 1 unit - 2 2 mm switching interval q B 3SE5 5-GA 1 1 unit - Short stroke q B 3SE5 5-NA 1 1 unit For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. Contact blocks with 3 contacts see page 13/49. 12/5 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/47 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches Accessories Selection and ordering data Version DT Order No. List Price $ per PS* PG Weight per approx. kg Plug-in connections for M2 1.5 connecting threads Connector sockets (6-pole+PE), for M2 1.5 B 3SY3 131 1 1 unit 12.3 For max. 25 V, 1 A With.75 mm 2 connecting cable, plastic, degree of protection IP65, ambient temperature 4 to +9 C Cable boxes (6-pole + PE) 1) With terminal compartment, can be preassembled, A 3SY3 136 1 1 unit 12.65 3SY3 136 plastic, degree of protection IP65 Connector sockets (4-pole), M12, for M2 1.5, fixed B 3SY3 127 1 1 unit 12.1 3SY3 131 For max 25 V, 4 A, U imp = 25 V With four.25 mm 2 connecting cables, plastic, degree of protection IP67, ambient temperature 4 to +85 C 3SY3 127 3SY3 134 3RX8 Adaptors for 3SE. (with M 16) Cable boxes (4-pole), M12, with terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled Angular cable boxes (4-pole), M12, with terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled Connector sockets (5-pole), M12, for M2 1.5, fixed For max 125 V, 4 A, U imp = 15 V With five.25 mm 2 connecting cables, plastic, degree of protection IP67, ambient temperature 4 to +85 C Cable boxes (5-pole), M12, with terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled Angular cable boxes (5-pole), M12, with terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled Connector sockets (8-pole), M12, for M2 1.5, fixed, metal version For max 3 V, 2 A, U imp = 8 V With eight.25 mm 2 connecting cables, metal, degree of protection IP67, ambient temperature 4 to +85 C Cable boxes (8-pole), M12 With 5 m R cable, 8.25 mm 2, IP67 A 3RX8 -CB45 1 1 unit 574.15 A 3RX8 -CC45 1 1 unit 574.15 B 3SY3 128 1 1 unit 12.1 A 3RX8 -CB55 1 1 unit 574.16 A 3RX8 -CC55 1 1 unit 574.16 B 3SY3 134 1 1 unit 12.25 A 3RX8 -CB81-1GF 1 1 unit 574.335 metal M16 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT 3SX1997 1 1 unit.22 3SX1997 Adaptors for 3SE2 (with M 2) plastic M2 x 1.5 wire gland 3SB391-CK 1 1 unit.11 3SX9918 metal M2 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT 3SX1998 1 1 unit.22 plastic M2 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT 3SX9918 1 1 unit.12 3SX1998 3SX9918 plastic cable gland, M2 x 1.5 3SX9926 1 1 unit.1 3SX9926 Adaptors for 3SE. (with M 25) metal M 25 x 1.5 to 1/2 NPT 3SX1999 1 1 unit.22 3SX1999 1) For wiring, a crimping tool is necessary, max. conductor cross-section 1 mm 2. 13/48 Product Category: LIMT

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches Accessories and spare parts Accessories and spare parts Version Color/ contacts DT Order No. Price per PS* Optional accessories for 3SE52 Protective caps, rubber, for rounded plungers acc. to EN 547, 3SE5...-..C5 Black A 3SE5 -AC3 1 1 unit 12 Spare parts for 3SE51, 3SE52 Empty enclosures, plastic Turquoise Enclosure width 31 mm B 3SE5 232-AC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection B 3SE5 232-AC5-1CA 1 1 unit Enclosure width 5 mm B 3SE5 242-AC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection B 3SE5 242-AC5-1CA 1 1 unit Enclosure width 31 mm Enclosure width 4 mm 2 contacts 3 contacts 2 contacts Empty enclosures, metal Turquoise Enclosure width 31 mm B 3SE5 212-AC5 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection B 3SE5 212-AC5-1CA 1 1 unit Enclosure width 4 mm B 3SE5 112-AA 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection B 3SE5 112-AA-1CA 1 1 unit Enclosure width 56 mm B 3SE5 122-AA 1 1 unit With increased corrosion protection B 3SE5 122-AA-1CA 1 1 unit Enclosure width 56 mm, XL 1) B 3SE5 162-AA 1 1 unit Contact blocks with 2 contacts 2) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE5 -BA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC - Standard q B 3SE5 -CA 1 1 unit - Gold-plated contacts q B 3SE5 -CA-1AC1 1 1 unit - 2 2 mm switching interval q B 3SE5 -GA 1 1 unit - Short stroke q B 3SE5 -NA 1 1 unit Contact blocks with 3 contacts Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 -KA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 -LA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with make-beforebreak 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE5 -MA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC A 3SE5 -PA 1 1 unit Contact blocks for enclosure XL 1) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 6-BA 1 1 unit Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 6-CA 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts with make-beforebreak 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 6-MA 1 1 unit q Positive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Equip XL enclosures only with contact combinations according to pages 12/11, 12/42 and 12/43. 2) Unsuitable for open-type position switches; see page 13/47. 12/52 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/49 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches Accessories and spare parts Version Rated voltage LED DT Order No. Price per V Spare parts for 3SE51, 3SE52 Covers for plastic enclosures, width 31 mm Turquoise with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 23-1AA 1 1 unit 23 AC B 3SE5 23-3AA 1 1 unit Yellow B 3SE5 23-AA-1AG 1 1 unit Yellow with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 23-1AA-1AG 1 1 unit 31 mm, turquoise with LED 23 AC B 3SE5 23-3AA-1AG 1 1 unit Covers for plastic enclosures, width 4 mm Turquoise with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 13-1AA 1 1 unit 23 AC B 3SE5 13-3AA 1 1 unit Yellow B 3SE5 13-AA-1AG 1 1 unit Yellow with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 13-1AA-1AG 1 1 unit 4 mm, yellow with LED 23 AC B 3SE5 13-3AA-1AG 1 1 unit Covers for plastic enclosures, width 5 mm Turquoise with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 24-1AA 1 1 unit 23 AC B 3SE5 24-3AA 1 1 unit Yellow B 3SE5 24-AA-1AG 1 1 unit 5 mm, turquoise with LED Yellow with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 24-1AA-1AG 1 1 unit 23 AC B 3SE5 24-3AA-1AG 1 1 unit Covers for metal enclosures, width 31 mm Turquoise with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 21-1AA 1 1 unit 23 AC B 3SE5 21-3AA 1 1 unit Yellow B 3SE5 21-AA-1AG 1 1 unit Yellow with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 21-1AA-1AG 1 1 unit 31 mm, turquoise with LED 23 AC B 3SE5 21-3AA-1AG 1 1 unit Covers for metal enclosures, width 4 mm Turquoise with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 11-1AA 1 1 unit 23 AC B 3SE5 11-3AA 1 1 unit Yellow B 3SE5 11-AA-1AG 1 1 unit Yellow with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 11-1AA-1AG 1 1 unit 4 mm, yellow with LED 23 AC B 3SE5 11-3AA-1AG 1 1 unit Covers for metal enclosures, width 56 mm Turquoise with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 12-1AA 1 1 unit 23 AC B 3SE5 12-3AA 1 1 unit Yellow B 3SE5 12-AA-1AG 1 1 unit Yellow with LED 24 DC B 3SE5 12-1AA-1AG 1 1 unit 56 mm, yellow with LED 23 AC B 3SE5 12-3AA-1AG 1 1 unit Covers for XL metal enclosures, width 56 mm Yellow B 3SE5 16-AA-1AG 1 1 unit PS* 13/5 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Limit Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches Technical General data data Technical specifications Type 3SE5 1.., 3SE5 2.. 3SE5 41. 3SE5 42. General data Standards IEC 6947-5-1, EN 6947-5-1 Rated insulation voltage U i V 4 4 Pollution degree acc. to IEC 6664-1 Class 3 Class 3 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 4 Rated operational voltage U e V 4 V AC, 3 AC over 3 V AC only for equal potential 1) Conventional thermal current I th A 1 6 1 Rated operational current I e 2-pole 3-pole 2-pole With alternating current 5/6 Hz I e / AC-15 I e / AC-15 I e / AC-15 - At 24 V A 6 6 6 - At 12 V A 6 3 6 - At 24 V A 3 1.5 3 For direct current I e / DC-13 I e / DC-13 I e / DC-13 - At 24 V A 3 3 3 - At 125 V A.55.55.55 - At 25 V A.27.27.27 Short-circuit protection 2) With DIAZED fuse links, A 6 gg operational class With miniature circuit breaker, Char. C A 1 2 1 Mechanical endurance Basic switches 15 1 6 operating cycles 3 1 6 operating cycles 3 1 6 operating cycles With spring rod, 3SE5...-..R.. 1 1 6 operating cycles With fork lever 3SE5 1..-..T.. 1 1 6 operating cycles Electrical endurance With 3RH.1, 3RT contactors in size S, S 1 1 6 operating cycles 1 1 6 operating cycles 5 1 6 operating cycles For utilization category AC-15 when.1 1 6 operating cycles switching off I e / AC-15 at 24 V With utilization category DC-12/DC-13 For direct current depending on the loading of the switch Switching frequency 6 operating cycles/h 18 operating cycles/h With 3RH.1, 3RT contactors in size S, S Switching accuracy mm.5 For repeated switching, measured at the plunger of the contact block With twist actuators 1 Rated data acc. to s, u and U. Rated voltage V 3 Uninterrupted current A 6 Switching capacity Heavy duty, A 3 / Q 3 A 3 / B 3 / Q 3 1) For slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC with make-before-break and 2 NO + 1 NC the following applies: over 25 V AC only equal potential 2) Without any welds according to IEC 6947-5-1. Type 3SE5 23. 3SE5 13 3SE5 24. 3SE5 21. 3SE5 11. 3SE5 12., 3SE5 4.. 3SE5 25. 3SE5 16. Enclosure Enclosure Material Ultramid A3X2G7 Zinc diecasting GD Zn Al4 Cu1 Width mm 31 4 5 31 4 56 3 / 4 3 Degree of protection acc. to IEC 6529 IP65 IP66/IP67 1) IP67 IP2, IP1 Ambient temperature During operation C 25... +85 25... +85 25... +85 In operation, switch with LEDs C 25... +7 Storage, transport C 4... +9 4... +9 4... +9 Mounting position Any Connection Cable entry 1 (M2 1.5) 2 (M2 1.5) 1 (M2 1.5) 3 (M2 1.5) 12 Conductor cross-sections 2) Solid mm² 2 x (.5....75), 1 (.5... 1.5) Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 (.5... 1.5) Tightening torque, contact block Nm.8... 1. Protective conductor connection inside enclosure M3.5 1) For twist actuators with spring rod and rod actuators: IP65/IP67. 2) For the maximum number of connectable conductors for the respective contact block see operating instructions. Siemens IC 1 212 13/51 12/7

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure widths 31 mm and 5 mm Configuration Actuation and operating travel (angle) for enclosure width 31 mm and 5 mm Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts Operating point acc. to EN 547 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC * q v max (snap-action) Operating point on return (snap-action) Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation Max. actuating speed 22 21 14 13 22 32 21 31 14 13 14 13 22 21 Contact closed Contact open Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 11 Rounded plungers, type B Actuation along plunger axis Actuation along plunger axis NSC_769 3SE5 2..-..C5 -.BC5 -.KC5 -.CC5, -.HC5 -.FC5 -.GC5 -.LC5 NSC_77 NSC_767 1 NO + 2 NC 14 32 22 13 31 21 Ident. No. 12 NSC_768 NSC_876 Ø7 v max = 1 m/s Minimum force required in direction of operation: 18 N Short stroke Angular roller levers Actuation along plunger axis Actuation along plunger axis Switching interval 2 2 mm 3SE5 2..-..F1. -.BF1 -.KF1 -.HF1 -.FC5 + head 1) -.GC5 + head 1) -.LF1 R 17 8,5 3,4 v max = 1 m/s 7,7 3 Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N 22,5 Ø13 NSC_886 mm 2,4 3,1 3,5 5,5 14,8 14,2 13,5 mm NSC_831a NSC_857a mm 2,6 3,2 3,8 5,5 14,2 13,6 13, mm 31-32 31-32 NSC_833a NSC_859a mm 1, 1,9 3, 5,5 12,5 11,9 11, mm * * NSC_832a NSC_858a mm,5 1,5 3, 5,5 13,2 7 2,3 mm * NSC_835a NSC_843 Short stroke mm 1, 1,3 3, 5,5 12,5 11,9 11, mm * * NSC_836a NSC_858a Switching interval 2 2 mm mm,8 2,2 3,2 5,5 13,8 13, 12,2 mm 31-32 31-32 * * NSC_834a NSC_86a Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts Operating point acc. to EN 547 (snap-action) * Operating point on return (snap-action) q Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation v max Max. actuating speed Roller plungers Contact closed Contact open Lateral actuation 1) The basic switch and actuator headactuator head must be ordered separately. Contact closed Contact open Lateral actuation 3SE5 2..-..D3, -..D4 3SE5 2..-..D1, -..D11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.BD3 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.HD3, -.HD1 Form C Central fixing 22 14 NSC_837a 14 22 Ø1 Ø1 3 3 21 13 mm 3,4 4, 4,8 13 21 mm 2,8 3,6 4,6 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.FC5 + head 1) 14 22 18 NSC_878 v max = 1 m/s Minimum force required in direction of operation: 18 N 42,4 NSC_882 NSC_769 13 21,9 2,6 4,6 Ident. No. 11 Short stroke 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.KD3, -.KD1 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.LD3 22 32 14 NSC_839a 14 32 22 NSC_77 31-32 21 31 13 mm 4,7 5,5 6 13 31 21 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 NSC_767 NSC_767 NSC_768 mm mm 3,2 3,9 4,9 NSC_838a NSC_841 NSC_84a 31-32 13/52

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure widths 31 mm and 5 mm Configuration Actuation and operating travel (angle) for enclosure width 31 mm and 5 mm Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts Operating point acc. to EN 547 (snap-action) * Operating point on return (snap-action) q Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation v max Max. actuating speed Roller levers, type E v max = 1 m/s Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N Contact closed Contact open Lateral actuation Contact closed Contact open Lateral actuation 3SE5 2..-..E1. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.BE1 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.HE1 14,7 22 14 NSC_849a 14 22 8,5 Ø13 3 21 13 mm 12,5 13,2 13,8 13 21 mm 9,4 1,4 11, Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.FC5 + head 2) 26,5 R14 NSC_884 13 21 2,3 6,9 13 Ident. No. 11 Short stroke 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.KE1 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.LE1 22 32 14 NSC_851a 14 32 22 31-32 21 31 13 mm 13, 13,8 14,4 13 31 21 mm 1,6 11,4 11,8 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 Twist levers 1), type A Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 2..-..K2. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.BK21 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.HK21 3 NSC_888 Ø19 22 2,8 13 v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum torque in direction of operation:.25 Nm 14 NSC_769 NSC_77 NSC_769 NSC_865a Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 Twist levers 1), adjustable length Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 2..-..K6. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.BC5 + head 2) 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.HK6 NSC_889 Ø19 44... 114 14 22 NSC_767 NSC_767 NSC_768 mm NSC_85a NSC_842 NSC_852a 31-32 21 13 36 38 4 9 13 21 34 36 38 9 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.FC5 + head 2) 14 22 NSC_926 * 13 21 7,5 22 44 9 Ident. No. 11 Short stroke 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.KK21 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.LK21 22 32 14 NSC_867a 14 32 22 NSC_868a 21 31 13 22 14 NSC_77 NSC_769 36 38 4 31-32 9 NSC_865a 14 22 13 31 21 NSC_767 NSC_767 NSC_768 34 36 NSC_866a 31-32 44 9 3 21 13 36 38 4 9 13 21 34 36 38 9 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.FC5 + head 2) 14 22 NSC_926 * 13 21 7,5 22 44 9 Ident. No. 11 Short stroke 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.KC5 + head 2) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.LC5 + head 2) 22 32 14 NSC_867a 14 32 22 NSC_868a v max = 1.5 m/s 31-32 31-32 Minimum torque 21 31 13 36 38 4 9 13 31 21 34 36 44 9 in direction of operation:.25 Nm Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 1) Adjustment of the lever in increments of 1, maximum deflection 9. 2) The basic switch and actuator head must be ordered separately. NSC_77 14 22 NSC_767 NSC_767 NSC_768 NSC_866a 13/53

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure widths 31 mm and 5 mm Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts Operating point acc. to EN 541/47 (snap-action) Operating point on return (snap-action) Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation Max. actuating speed Contact closed Contact open * q v max Twist levers 1), adjustable length Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 1) Adjustment of the lever in increments of 1, maximum deflection 9. 2) The basic switch and actuator head must be ordered separately. Contact closed Contact open 3SE5 2..-..K5. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.BK5 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.HK5 Ø19 22 14 NSC_98 14 22 3 NSC_928 44... 114 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.FC5 + head 2) 13 21 7,5 22 9 Ident. No. 11 Short stroke 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.KC5 + head 2) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.LK5 22 32 14 NSC_91 14 32 22 NSC_911 xv max = 1.5 m/s 31-32 31-32 Minimum torque 21 31 13 36 38 9 13 31 21 34 36 9 in direction of operation:.25 Nm Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 Rod actuators 1), type D Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 2..-..K8. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.BC5 + head 2) 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.HK8, -.HK82 21 13 13 21 Ø6 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.FC5 + head 2) 14 22 11 13 21 7,5 22 9 Ident. No. 11 Short stroke 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.KC5 + head 2) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.LC5 + head 2) 22 32 14 NSC_91 14 32 22 v max = 1.5 m/s 31-32 31-32 Minimum torque 21 31 13 36 38 9 13 31 21 34 36 9 in direction of operation:.25 Nm Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 Spring rods Deflection of spring rod 3SE5 2..-..R. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.HR1 NSC_89 Ø7 142,3 113... 23 v max = 1 m/s Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N Ø7 75,8 NSC_891 Ø7 242,3 21 22 13 14 NSC_769 NSC_77 NSC_769 NSC_77 36 38 36 38 9 NSC_98 9 The spring rods can be used only with snap-action contacts. 13 14 14 14 21 22 22 22 13 21 7 15 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 2..-.FC5 + head 2) 14 22 13 21 2,5 7 Ident. No. 11 Short stroke 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 2..-.LC5 + head 2) 14 32 22 13 31 21 Ident. No. 12 NSC_767 NSC_767 NSC_768 NSC_767 NSC_767 NSC_768 NSC_767 NSC_767 NSC_768 7 34 36 34 36 15 NSC_99 9 NSC_927 NSC_99 9 NSC_927 NSC_911 NSC_873a NSC_844 NSC_874a 31-32 13/54

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure widths 4 mm and 56 mm Configuration Actuation and operating travel (angle) for enclosure width 4 mm and 56 mm Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts Operating point acc. to EN 541 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 2 NC 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO + 2 NC * q v max (snap-action) Operating point on return (snap-action) Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation Max. actuating speed 22 21 14 13 22 32 21 31 14 13 14 13 22 21 14 32 22 13 31 21 Contact closed Contact open Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 12 Rounded plungers, type B Actuation along plunger axis Actuation along plunger axis NSC_769 3SE5 1..-..C2 3SE5 1..-.BC2 3SE5 1..-.KC2 3SE5 1..-.CC2 3SE5 1..-.LC2 NSC_77 NSC_767 NSC_768 25,5 Ø1 NSC_875 v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum force required in direction of operation: 18 N mm 2,4 3,1 3,5 5,5 NSC_831a mm 2,6 3,2 3,8 5,5 31-32 NSC_833a mm 1, 1,9 3, 5,5 * NSC_832a mm 31-32,8 * 2,2 3,2 5,5 NSC_834a Angular roller levers Actuation along plunger axis Actuation along plunger axis 3SE5 112-..F. 3SE5 1..-.BF1 3SE5 1..-.KA + head 1) 3SE5 1..-.CF1 3SE5 1..-.LF1 11 5,5 R33 v max = 2.5 m/s 3 4 Ø22 Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N NSC_885 16,8 16,2 15,5 mm NSC_861a 2,2 19,8 19,2 mm 31-32 NSC_863a 14,5 14, 13, NSC_862a 15,8 15,2 * 14,2 * mm mm 31-32 NSC_864a Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts * q v max Operating point acc. to EN 541 (snap-action) Operating point on return (snap-action) Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation Max. actuating speed Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Roller plungers, type C Lateral actuation Lateral actuation 3SE5 1..-..D2 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.BD2 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CD2 Ø13 22 14 NSC_845a 14 22 * 3 21 13 mm 3,8 4,4 5, 13 21 mm 3,3 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 38,5 NSC_88 NSC_769 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.KD2 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LD2 v max = 1 m/s 22 32 14 NSC_847a 14 32 22 Minimum force required * 31-32 in direction of operation: 18 N 21 31 13 mm 5,4 6, 6,8 13 31 21 mm 3,8 4,4 4,8 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 1) The basic switch and actuator head must be ordered separately. NSC_77 NSC_767 NSC_768 4,1 5, NSC_846a NSC_848a 31-32 13/55

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure widths 31 mm and 5 mm Configuration Actuation and operating travel (angle) for enclosure width 4 mm and 56 mm Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts * q v max Operating point acc. to EN 541 (snap-action) Operating point on return (snap-action) Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation Max. actuating speed Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open Roller levers Lateral actuation Lateral actuation 3SE5 1..-..E. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.BE1 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CE1 22 14 NSC_853a 14 22 19,8 Ø22 41 R2 NSC_883 v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum torque in direction of operation:.25 Nm Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 Twist levers 1), adjustable length Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 1..-..H6. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.BH6 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CH6 31-32 31-32 21 31 13 3 32 34 9 13 31 21 2 32 4 9 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum torque in direction of operation:.25 Nm Fork levers 1) Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 1..-..T1. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CT11 v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum torque in direction of operation:.25 Nm NSC_769 The fork levers can be used only with snap-action contacts. Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LA + head 2) 14 32 22 13 31 21 Ident. No. 12 1) Adjustment of the lever in increments of 1, maximum deflection 9. 2) The basic switch and actuator head must be ordered separately. NSC_767 NSC_854a 3 21 13 mm 1,2 1,8 11,2 13 21 mm 8,1 8,7 9,4 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.KE1 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LE1 11 22 32 14 NSC_855a 14 32 22 NSC_856a v max = 2.5 m/s 31-32 31-32 Minimum force required 21 31 13 mm 11,1 11,9 12,4 13 31 21 mm 9,1 9,7 1,6 in direction of operation: 9 N Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 Twist levers 1), type A Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 1..-..H. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.BH1 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CH1 3 NSC_887 3 NSC_889 3 Ø19 49,5 Ø19 44... 114 Ø19 49,5 NSC_95 NSC_77 22 14 NSC_869a 14 22 NSC_87a * 21 13 3 32 34 9 13 21 2 32 4 9 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.KH1 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LH1 22 32 14 NSC_871a 14 32 22 NSC_872a 21 31 13 NSC_769 NSC_77 NSC_769 31-32 3 32 34 9 13 31 21 NSC_768 NSC_767 NSC_768 2 * * 31-32 32 4 9 22 14 NSC_869a 14 22 NSC_87a * 21 13 3 32 34 9 13 21 2 32 4 9 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.KA + head 2) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LH6 22 32 14 NSC_871a 14 32 22 NSC_872a NSC_77 14 13 22 21 NSC_767 NSC_768 NSC_767 NSC_768 NSC_916 6 9 55 6 NSC_917 31-32 9 13/56

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure widths 4 mm and 56 mm Operation by bar (standard) Slow-action contacts Snap-action contacts Operating point acc. to EN 541/47 (snap-action) Operating point on return (snap-action) Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Direction of operation Max. actuating speed Contact closed Contact open Contact closed Contact open * q v ma Twist levers 1), adjustable length Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 1..-..H5. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.BH5 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CH5, -.CH51 Ø19 22 14 NSC_912 14 22 3 NSC_928 44... 114 NSC_769 21 13 3 32 9 13 21 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.KA + head 2) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LH5 22 32 14 NSC_914 14 32 22 31-32 21 31 13 3 32 9 13 31 21 2 32 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 NSC_77 v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum torque in direction of operation:.25 Nm Rod actuators 1), type D Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation 3SE5 1..-..H8. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.BA + head 2) 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CH8, -.CH82 22 14 NSC_912 14 22 NSC_913 NSC_89 Ø6 11 113... 23 NSC_769 21 13 3 32 9 13 21 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.KA + head 2) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LA + head 2) 22 32 14 NSC_914 14 32 22 31-32 31-32 21 31 13 3 32 9 13 31 21 2 32 9 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 12 NSC_77 v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum torque in direction of operation:.25 Nm Spring rods Deflection of spring rod 3SE5 1..-..R. 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5 1..-.CR1 Ø7 Ø7 75,8 Ø7 The spring rods can be used only with snap-action contacts. 14 22 13 21 Ident. No. 11 NSC_767 NSC_768 NSC_767 NSC_768 NSC_767 2 2 7 15 NSC_913 32 9 NSC_915 31-32 9 32 9 NSC_915 NSC_873a 142,3 242,3 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 1..-.LA + head 2 ) 14 32 22 NSC_874a NSC_891 13 31 21 Ident. No. 12 NSC_768 7 15 31-32 v max = 1 m/s Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N 1) Adjustment of the lever in increments of 1, maximum deflection 9. 2) The basic switch and actuator head must be ordered separately. 13/57

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches Dimensional drawings Dimensions of the basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm, EN 547, with M2 1.5 connecting thread 3SE5 232, 3SE5 212 Enclosure width 31 mm, EN 547, rear with fixing holes 3SE5 232, 3SE5 212 Enclosure width 31 mm, EN 547, with M12 connector socket 3SE5 234, 3SE5 212 Ø4,3 7,7 Ø7 Contact block (replaceable) Contact block (integrated) Ø7 6,9 2 22 4 13 68 31 M2x1,5 12,5 15 33 NSC_751 5 Ø7x3 22 3 13 42,8 4 Ø4x6 NSC_96 5 22 Ø7x3 22 13 Ø4x5 3 Ø4x6 35,9 4 M12x1 Enclosure width 5 mm, with M2 1.5 connecting thread 3SE5 242 Enclosure width 5 mm, rear with fixing holes 3SE5 242 Enclosure width 4 mm, EN 541, with M2 1.5 connecting thread 3SE5 112, 3SE5 132 2 22 M2x1,5 4 4,4 13 18,5 7,7 Ø4,3 Ø7 53 4 42 5 5,5 12,5 15 33 NSC_752 22 NSC_97 6,9 Ø4x5 Ø5,3 3 3 4,5 7,7 12,5 2 6 78 M2x1,5 16,3 15,3 37,3 Ø7 NSC_753a Enclosure width 4 mm, EN 541, with 6-pole connector socket 3SE5 115 Enclosure width 56 mm, with M2 1.5 connecting thread 3SE5 122 XL enclosure, width 56 mm, with M2 1.5 connecting thread 3SE5 162 4,5 Ø5,3 3 7,7 6 12,5 78 2 M2x1,5 26 16,3 Ø7 NSC_84a Ø5,4 4 M2x1,5 56 6 13,5 7,7 2 5,5 78 16,3 15,3 37,8 Ø7 NSC_754 Ø5,4 4 M2x1,5 6 13,5 7,7 2 1 16,3 Ø7 NSC_939 M26x1,5 3 15,3 37,3 56 5,5 15,3 37 Operating mechanisms for basic switches, see pages 13/59 and 13/6.. 13/58

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Limit Switches Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches 3SE5, open-type design General data Operating mechanisms for enclosure width 31 mm and 5 mm Roller plunger, type C acc. to EN 547 Roller plunger with central fixing Roller lever, type E acc. to EN 547 Ø1 4,8 Ø1 4,8 14,7 8,5 SW24 Ø13 7 NSC_786 Ø23 11,5 18 35,9 42,4 NSC_785 8,5 R14 NSC_787 Ø23 26,5 Angular roller lever Twist lever, type A acc. to EN 547 Twist lever, roller 3 mm 8,5 R 17 3,4 8,5 Ø13 NSC_788 7 Ø23 22,5 NSC_789a Ø24 Ø19 2,8 13 24 3 7,2 23,65 34 NSC_792a Ø24 Ø3 2,8 13 24 32 7,2 23,65 37 Operating mechanism for enclosure width 4 mm and 56 mm Plain plunger Rounded plunger, type B acc. to EN 541 Ø1 Ø1 Roller plunger, type C acc. to EN 541 Ø13 5 Ø23 5,5 11,5 NSC_94 NSC_755 Ø23 15,5 25,5 NSC_756 28,5 38,5 Ø23 Roller lever Angular roller lever Twist lever, type A acc. to EN 541 19,8 Ø22 9 R2 41 R33 Ø22 9 4 Ø19 43 39 23,65 11 12 NSC_757 12 Ø23 11 5,5 12,5 NSC_758 Ø23 NSC_76a Ø24 13 49,5 24 7,2 Twist lever, 2 rollers 19 mm Fork lever, roller 19 mm NSC_82a Ø24 Ø19 27 13 24 52,4 47 39 23,65 7,2 Ø24 Ø19 13 49,5 24 23,65 45 39 7,2 41 NSC_761a 12 Twist lever, roller 3 mm Twist lever, roller 5 mm Twist lever, rubber roller 5 mm Ø3 39 7,2 Ø5 39 Ø5 4 23,65 23,65 23,65 NSC_765a Ø24 13 27 24 44,4 NSC_825a Ø24 27 13 24 7,2 44,4 NSC_766a Ø24 27 13 24 8,6 46,4 Siemens IC 1 212 13/59 12/9

SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches Dimensional drawings Operating mechanisms for all enclosure widths Twist lever, adjustable length, roller 19 mm Twist lever, adjustable length, with grid hole, roller 19 mm Twist lever, adjustable length, roller 3 mm Ø19 7.2 Ø19 7.2 Ø3 7.2 NSC_762a 16 12 13 44... 114 24 32 37 25.65 Ø24 19 21.5 29.8 38 45.3 53 6.7 68.4 76.1 83.8 91.5 12 16 13 44... 114 24 NSC_764a Ø24 32 37 25.65 19 NSC_819a 16 12 13 55... 119 24 25.65 32 37 Ø24 114.5 Twist lever, adjustable length, roller 5 mm Twist lever, adjustable length, rubber roller 5 mm Twist lever, adjustable length, with grid hole, rubber roller 5 mm Ø5 7.2 Ø5 8.6 Ø5 8.6 NSC_793a 16 13 75... 129 24 25.65 32 37 124.5 NSC_826a 16 13 75... 129 24 25.65 33 39 124.5 NSC_827 16 13 76... 129.5 24 25.65 33 39 124.5 12 Ø24 12 Ø24 12 Ø24 Rod actuator Spring rod, length 142.5 mm Spring rod, length 242.5 mm Ø7 Ø7 NSC_763 Ø6 11 13 113... 23 2 24 Ø24 33.5 28.5 NSC_759 42.3 5 5 142.3 NSC_791 42.3 15 5 242.3 Ø24 Ø24 Spring rod, length 76 mm Ø7 NSC_79 42.3 23.5 1 75.8 Ø24 13/6

SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Limit Switches Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 International Limit Switches Circuit diagrams Enclosure widths 31, 4, 5 and 56 mm Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5...-.B..., -.R... 22 14 21 13 NSC_769 Slow-action contacts 2 NO + 1 NC 3SE5...-.P... 22 34 14 NSC_934 21 33 13 Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5...-.C..., -.F..., -.G..., -.H..., -.N... 14 22 13 21 NSC_767 Dimensional drawings General data Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5...-.K..., -.Q... Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC with make-beforebreak, 3SE5...-.M... Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5...-.L... 22 32 14 22 36 18 14 32 22 21 31 13 NSC_77 21 35 17 NSC_935 13 31 21 NSC_768 XL enclosures, width 56 mm Slow-action contacts 2 x (1 NO + 1 NC) 3SE5 162-B... Slow-action contacts 2 x (1 NO + 2 NC) with makebefore-break, 3SE5 162-D... For slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC with make-beforebreak, 1 NO + 1 NC, 3SE5 162-E... Snap-action contacts 2 x (1 NO + 1 NC) 3SE5 162-C... 22 14 52 44 22 36 18 52 66 48 22 36 18 52 44 14 22 34 42 21 13 NSC_769 51 43 NSC_941 21 35 17 NSC_935 51 65 47 NSC_936 21 35 17 NSC_935 51 43 NSC_941 13 21 NSC_767 33 41 NSC_938 3SE5 connector assignment M12 connector socket, 4-pole 3SY3 127 M12 connector socket, 5-pole 3SY3 128 M12 connector socket, 8-pole 3SY3 134 Connector sockets, 6-pole + PE 3SY3 131 2 3 NSC_821 1 4 2 3 NSC_822 1 5 4 3 2 4 NSC_929 5 1 7 8 6 3 2 4 PE NSC_823 1 5 6 Order No. Connector sockets Contacts LEDs Connections Type Version Version Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 PE M12 connector sockets (4-, 5- or 8-pole) 3SE5..4-...-1AC4 3SY3 127 1 NO + 1 NC 21 22 13 14 3SE5..4-...-1AC5 3SY3 128 1 NO + 1 NC 21 22 13 14 PE 3SE5..4-...-1AE 3SY3 127 2 NC 21 22 31 32 3SE5..4-...-1AE1 3SY3 128 2 NC 21 22 31 32 PE 3SE5..4-1C...-1AF3 3SY3 128 1 NO + 1 NC snap action 3SE5..4-1B...-1AF3 3SY3 128 1 NO + 1 NC slow-action 3SE5..4-1L...-1AD4 3SY3 134 1 NO + 2 NC snap action 3SE5..4-1K...-1AD4 3SY3 134 1 NO + 2 NC slow-action Connector sockets, 6-pole + PE 2 LEDs 21 22 13 / LED gn 2 LEDs 21 22 14 / LED gn 2 LEDs 21 22 13 / LED gn 2 LEDs 21 22 14 / LED gn 14 / LED ye 13/ LED ye 14 / LED ye 13/ LED ye 2 LEDs 21 22 31 32 13 / LED gn 2 LEDs 21 22 31 32 14 / LED gn Connected Not available Ground LED Ground LED 31 32 Ground PE LED 31 32 Ground PE LED 3SE5..5-...-1AD 3SY3 131 1 NO + 1 NC 21 22 13 14 3SE5..5-...-1AD1 3SY3 131 1 NO + 2 NC 21 22 13 14 31 32 3SE5..5-.C...-1AF2 3SY3 131 1 NO + 1 NC snap action 2 LEDs 21 22 13 / LED gn 14 / LED ye Ground LED 3SE5..5-.B...-1AF2 3SY3 131 1 NO + 1 NC slow-action 3SE5..5-.L...-1AD2 3SY3 131 2 NC snap-action 3SE5..5-.K...-1AD2 3SY3 131 2 NC slow-action gn Green ye Yellow 2 LEDs 21 22 14 / LED gn 13 / LED ye Ground LED Ground LED Ground LED 12 Siemens IC 1 212 13/61 12/11

3SE3 North American Limit Switches General Information Features Modular plug-in Prewired receptacle with pin connector Prewired cable Features UL Listed, CSA Certified. UL File: E47512 All Captive Screws. Keyed, Four-Directional Head. Steel-Reinforced Diaphragm Seal Between Operational Head And Switch Body. Permanent Instructions for Adjusting Operational Head. Modular, Plug-In Housing 1.Heavy-Duty, Bifurcated, Plug-In Prongs. 2.Ample Receptacle Wiring Space with 1/2 - NPT threaded conduit opening. 3.Stepped Terminals On Single Pole; Deep Center Trough On Double Pole. NEMA Type 6P Submersible 1.Completely Sealed With Epoxy. 2.SOOW-A Cable or Prewired Receptacle With Pin Connector. 3.Factory wired cable features a 35 pound pullput capacity. Rotary heads are field convertible CW, CCW, or both without special tools. Design Modular Plug-In Housing These heavy duty plug-in limit switches may be provided as complete devices using a composite catalog number; or, separately as components; operating head, plug-in module and base receptacle. Example: Complete Switch: 3SE3-AR1 Single Pole, Double Throw contacts with Side Rotary, Momentary Head Components 3SE3-SA Single Pole, Double Throw Plug-in Module 3SE3-DR1 Side Rotary Head, Momentary 3SE3-RA Standard, Single Pole Receptacle, 1 NO + 1 NC Since components may be interchanged, operating heads, plug-in modules and receptacles may be combined to satisfy most of your everyday limit switch requirements. This leads to less inventory with greater flexibility. Operating heads include side rotary; plain and roller plunger; and, wobble. A variety of levers are available. The zinc die-cast housing has an epoxy finish to protect against corrosion. All screws on the module and head are captive. NEMA Type 6P Submersible These heavy duty prewired, factory sealed switches meet the demanding enclosure requirements of UL (NEMA) Type 3, 4, 4X, 6P, 12, and 13. They are intended for wet environments where the integrity of the threaded conduit and switch body seals must be assured. The switch body cavity including threaded conduit entry is completely sealed with epoxy. An 8 foot, 5 or 9 conductor SOOW-A cable; or 5 or 9 pin prewired receptacle with pin connector is provided as standard. Switches are provided as complete devices using composite catalog numbers; or, separately as components; operating head and switch body. UL (NEMA) Type 6P switches are designed to provide a degree of protection against the entry of water during prolonged submersion at limited depths (tested with a 6 foot head of water for 24 hours). Both the Modular Plug-in and the (NEMA) Type 6P Submersible styles provide 6 Amp make and 6 Amp break 12V AC and 1 Amp continuous current for 12, 24, 48 and 6V AC. The circuit contact configuration depends on the device selected and the application criteria. Switches are available with momentary or maintained operating heads; and, single pole, double pole or center neutral (modular, plug-in only) contact configurations. 3SE3 limit switches offer a new standard of reliability and quality in automatic control circuits under heavy duty applications. Plug-in module and receptacle are keyed. 13/62

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible Technical data Type Mechanical life Electrical life Switching frequency Operating point accuracy Cable entry Ambient temperature Degree of protection Conductor size Mounting Tightening Torque Modular, Plug-in and NEMA Type 6P Submersible Side rotary: 13 x 1 6 make-break operations minimum All others: 1 x 1 6 make-break operations minimum Single Pole: 1 x 1 6 operations typical at full load Double Pole: 1 x 1 5 operations typical at full load 8 x 1 3 make-break operations per hour (maximum) Side operated:.12 in. (modular, plug-in housing) Side rotary:.14 in. (modular plug-in). Top operated:.3 in. (modular, plug-in housing) 1/2 in.-npt, Prewired Cable or Prewired Receptacle with Pin Connector Without Cable: 1 to +121 C, 14 to 25 F With Cable: 1 to +15 C, 14 to 221 F NEMA Type 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 13; IP67 22 12 AWG (modular, plug-in housing), single or stranded wire 5 or 9 conductor, 16 AWG yellow jacketed type SOOW-A cable (prewired cable) 5 or 9 pin,.87 in. (22 mm) diameter receptacle (prewired receptacle with pin connector) Any position Switch body screws: 25 3 lb-in. Operating head screws: 14 18 lb-in. DC, AC, NEMA rating NEMA R3 NEMA A6 Maximum current at 125V 25V 12V 24V 48V 6V Make Break.22A.22A.11A.11A 6A 6A 3A 3A 15A 1.5A 12A 1.2A Max. volt-ampere Make Break 28VA 28VA 28VA 28VA 72VA 72VA 72VA 72VA 72VA 72VA 72VA 72VA Rated thermal current Rated operating voltage DC, 1A DC, 3V AC, 1A AC, 6V Operating temperature 1 ) 2 ) Temperature rating 1 Side rotary 3 ) 2 3 1) Temperature ranges below +32 F ( C) are based on absence of freezing moisture or water. 2) For temperature rating of specific switch, refer to page 13/7, Operating Heads. Operation Temperature range Type Return Without cable With cable Center neutral Side rotary Side plunger Two-sided plunger Roller side plunger 4 ) Top plunger Top roller plunger 4 ) Wobble head 3) For CW only or CCW only operation, upper temperature limit increases to 25 F (121 C) without cable, and 221 F (15 C) with pre-wired cable. 4) Roller direction can be converted in the field. Momentary CW only or CCW only Momentary CW or CCW Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Momentary Momentary Momentary 1 F to 2 F -12 C to 94 C 14 F to 2 F -1 C to 94 C 14 F to 25 F -1 C to 121 C 1 F to 2 F -12 C to 94 C 14 F to 2 F -1 C to 94 C 14 F to 221 F -1 C to 15 C 13/63

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in metal housing Complete switches without lever - threaded cable entry: Plug-In module type Standard single pole 1 NO + 1 NC (3SE3-SA) Standard double pole 2 NO + 2 NC (3SE3-SB) Receptacle type surface mount Single pole (3SE3-RA) Double pole (3SE3-RB) Composite catalog number consisting of head, module and receptacle Operating head type Standard momentary (3SE3-DR1) DT Catalog Number 3SE3-AR1 List Price $ 1 unit DT Catalog Number 3SE3-BR1 List Price $ 1 unit Side rotary CW and CCW operation convertible to CW only or CCW only Standard maintained (3SE3-DM1) Low torqued momentary (3SE3-DL1) 3SE3-AM1 3SE3-AL1 3SE3-BM1 3SE3-BL1 Plain side plunger Momentary (3SE3-DS1) 3SE3-AS1 3SE3-BS1 Roller side plunger Momentary (3SE3-DS3) 3SE3-AS3 3SE3-BS3 Two-sided plunger Maintained (3SE3-DH1) 3SE3-AH1 3SE3-BH1 Plain top plunger Momentary (3SE3-DT1) 3SE3-AT1 3SE3-BT1 Roller top plunger Momentary (3SE3-DT3) 3SE3-AT3 3SE3-BT3 Wobble head (without lever) Momentary (3SE3-DW1) 3SE3-AW1 3SE3-BW1 Plug-In module type Center neutral Double pole 2 NO + 2 NC (3SE3-SN) Center neutral (3SE3-RB) Receptacle type surface mount CW CCW Composite catalog number consisting of head, module and receptacle Operating head type DT Catalog Number List Price $ 1 unit Side rotary (momentary) Center Neutral (3SE3-DN1) (3SE3-DN2) 3SE3-NN1 3SE3-NN2 5 pretravel to operate contacts. 15 pretravel to operate contacts. 13/64 Product Category: LIMT

3SE3 North American Limit Switches NEMA type 6P submersible, prewired cable Complete switches without lever - prewired cable: Switch body type prewired cable with 8 foot cable Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC (3SE3-SA6P) Cable color code 1 - White 2 - Black 3 - Red 4 - Orange 5 - Green Double pole 2 NO + 2 NC (3SE3-SB6P) Cable color code 1 - White 6 - Pink 2 - Black 7 - Yellow 3 - Red 8 - Blue 4 - Orange 9 - Green 5 - Brown Operating head type Side rotary CW and CCW operation convertible to CW only or CCW only Plain side plunger Standard momentary (3SE3-DR1) Standard maintained (3SE3-DM1) Low torqued momentary (3SE3-DL1) Momentary (3SE3-DS1) Composite catalog number consisting of head and switch body DT Catalog Number 3SE3-AR16P 3SE3-AM16P 3SE3-AL16P 3SE3-AS16P List Price $ 1 unit Catalog Number 3SE3-BR16P 3SE3-BM16P 3SE3-BL16P 3SE3-BS16P List Price $ 1 unit Roller side plunger Momentary (3SE3-DS3) 3SE3-AS36P 3SE3-BS36P Two-sided plunger Maintained (3SE3-DH1) 3SE3-AH16P Not available Plain top plunger Momentary (3SE3-DT1) 3SE3-AT16P 3SE3-BT16P Roller top plunger Momentary (3SE3-DT3) 3SE3-AT36P 3SE3-BT36P Wobble head (without lever) Momentary (3SE3-DW1) 3SE3-AW16P 3SE3-BW16P Product Category: LIMT 13/65

3SE3 North American Limit Switches NEMA type 6P submersible, prewired receptacle Complete switches without lever - prewired receptacle with pin connector: Switch Body Type prewired receptacle with pin connector Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC (3SE3-SA6PC) Double pole 2 NO + 2 NC (3SE3-SB6PC) Operating head type Side rotary CW and CCW operation convertible to CW only or CCW only Plain side plunger Standard momentary (3SE3-DR1) Standard maintained (3SE3-DM1) Low torqued momentary (3SE3-DL1) Momentary (3SE3-DS1) Composite catalog number consisting of head and switch body DT Catalog Number 3SE3-AR16PC 3SE3-AM16PC 3SE3-AL16PC 3SE3-AS16PC List Price $ 1 unit Catalog Number 3SE3-BR16PC 3SE3-BM16PC 3SE3-BL16PC 3SE3-BS16PC List Price $ 1 unit Roller side plunger Momentary (3SE3-DS3) 3SE3-AS36PC 3SE3-BS36PC Two-sided plunger Maintained (3SE3-DH1) 3SE3-AH16PC Not available Plain top plunger Momentary (3SE3-DT1) 3SE3-AT16PC 3SE3-BT16PC Roller top plunger Momentary (3SE3-DT3) 3SE3-AT36PC 3SE3-BT36PC Wobble head (without lever) Momentary (3SE3-DW1) 3SE3-AW16PC 3SE3-BW16PC 13/66 Product Category: LIMT

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible Components: Plug-in module Receptacle Plug-in module DT Catalog Number Standard single pole 1 NO + 1 NC Standard double pole 2 NO + 2 NC Center neutral 2 NO + 2 NC 3SE3-SA 3SE3-SB 3SE3-SN Receptacle for plug-in module Catalog Number Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC (5 terminals) Single pole 2 NO + 2 NC (9 terminals) 3SE3-RA 3SE3-RB List Price $ 1 unit List Price $ 1 unit Switch body _ NEMA type 6P submersible: Prewired cable Switch body Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC Single pole 2 NO + 2 NC Prewired cable 8 foot length Catalog List Price $ DT Number 1 unit 3SE3-SA6P 3SE3-SB6P Prewired receptacle with pin connector DT Catalog Number List Price $ 1 unit Prewired receptacle Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC Single pole 2 NO + 2 NC 3SE3-SA6PC 3SE3-SB6PC Operating heads : Operating head type Side rotary Plain side plunger Roller side plunger Two-sided plunger Plain top plunger Roller top plunger Wobble head Standard momentary Low torqued momentary Standard maintained Nominal operating data Minimum return force Operating temp range Total Operating Release Catalog travel Pretravel force position DT Number 9 5 3 lb-in. 2 4.5 oz-in. 1 3SE3-DR1 9 15 1.5 lb-in. 6 2.5 oz-in. 1 3SE3-DL1 9 5 3 lb-in. 5 _ 2 3SE3-DM1 Momentary.25 in..65 in. 4 lbs.3 in. 8 oz. 2 3SE3-DS1 Momentary.25 in..65 in. 4 lbs.3 in. 8 oz. 2 3SE3-DS3 Maintained.32 in..2 in. 5 lbs.13 in. 5 lbs 2 3SE3-DH1 Momentary.28 in..4 in. 4 lbs.2 in. 8 oz. 3 3SE3-DT1 Momentary.28 in..4 in. 4 lbs.2 in. 8 oz. 3 3SE3-DT3 Momentary 15 1 2 lb-in. 6 2.4 oz-in. 3 3SE3-DW1 List Price $ 1 unit Center neutral Momentary 9 9 5 15 1.8 lb-in. 1.8 lb-in. 2 2 2.5 oz-in. 2.5 oz-in. 2 2 3SE3-DN1 3SE3-DN2 For use with 3SE3-DN1, -DN2 operating heads and 3SE3-RB receptacle only. For use with modular, Plug-in and NEMA Type 6P. Refer to Operating Temperature, Catalog page 13/118 for Temperature Ranges. Without Operating Levers. CW and CCW operation. Convertible to CW or CCW operation only. Convertible Horizontal to Vertical. Requires Lever. For use with 3SE3-SN plug-in module only. 13/67

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in metal housing Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions most widely used Description Roller mounted on Roller Roller Roller face Max required return torque Catalog Length side of lever material diameter width (oz-in.) DT Number 1.5 (38) Front Nylatron.75 (19).31 (8).53 3SX3-KL2 Roller crank 1.5 (38) Front Cast aluminum.75 (19).31 (8) 1.1 3SX3-KL355 lever 1.5 (38) Back Cast aluminum.75 (19).31 (8) 1.1 3SX3-KL579 Fork lever 1.5 (38) Back / back Nylatron.75 (19).31 _ 3SX3-KL24 List Price $ 1 unit Adjustable radius lever 1 3.5 (25 89) Front 1 3.5 (25 89) Front Nylatron.75 (19).75 (19).31 (8).31 (8) 1.9 3.4 3SX3-KL21 3SX3-KL538 Rod lever 9 (229) _ Stainless steel 7. 3SX3-KL22 Adjustable spring rod Flexible loop lever _ 12.125 (38) Nylon 3.5 3SX3-KL556 _ 6 (152) Nylatron.4 3SX3-KL142 Levers Rod Nylon _ Coil spring Coil spring _ For plunger actuated switches wobble actuators 3SX3-KW2 3SX3-KW4 Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions: Operator Standard lever Cast aluminum Roller Max required Catalog Number Length Type Diameter Face (width) return torque Stainless Cast (oz-in.) steel DT aluminum.87 (22).75 (19).31 (8).62 _ 3SX3-KL39 1.37 (35).75 (19).31 (8).95 _ 3SX3-KL4 Nylatron.75 (19) 1. (25).92 _ 3SX3-KL337 1.5 (38) Ball bearing.69 (17).25 (6).77 _ 3SX3-KL531 Without roller.32 _ 3SX3-KL32 2. (51) 25 (64) 3. (76) Nylatron Nylatron Ball bearing Nylatron Nylatron Nylatron Ball bearing Nylatron Nylatron Nylatron Ball bearing.75 (19).75 (19).75 (19).69 (17).75 (19).75 (19) 1.5 (38).75 (19).69 (17).75 (19).75 (19) 1.5 (38).75 (19).69 (17).31 (8) 1. (25).31 (8).25 (6).31 (8) 1. (25).28 (7).31 (8).25 (6).31 (8) 1. (25).28 (7).31 (8).25 (6).71 1.45 1.5 1.1 1. 1.8 1.4 2. 1.5 1.3 2.3 1.8 2.5 1.8 3SX3-KL546 3SX3-KL572 3SX3-KL549 3SX3-KL552 3SX3-KL547 3SX3-KL573 3SX3-KL575 3SX3-KL55 3SX3-KL553 3SX3-KL548 3SX3-KL574 3SX3-KL576 3SX3-KL551 3SX3-KL554 List Price $ 1 unit All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or construction purposes. Roller lever: Length from the operating shaft axis to the roller axis. All other: Length from the operating shaft axis to the tip. Caution When selecting lever, required return torque should not exceed minimum return torque in operating head. Cap screw accommodates 3/64 inch Allen wrench. By re-assembling lever minimum can be reduced another.5 (13). Applies when lever extended to maximum dimension. See dimensions page 13/76. 13/68 Product Category: LIMT

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions most widely used Roller Operator Roller levers Cast aluminum Stainless steel Length Inches (mm) Type Diameter In. (mm) Face width in. (mm) Roller on reverse side 1.5 (38) Nylatron Nylatron Ball bearing.75 (19) 1.5 (38).69 (17).31 (8).28 (7).25 (6).53.96.77 Offset lever 1.5 (38) Nylatron.75 (19).31 (8).65 (Inboard roller Inboard roller.75 (19).31 (8) 1.2 shown) Ball bearing.69 (17).25 (6).9 1.5 (38) Nylatron.75 (19).31 (8).65 outboard roller.75 (19).31 (8) 1.2 Ball bearing.69 (17).25 (6).9 Nylatron.75 (19) 1 (25) 1.1 Bantam lever.69 (18).88 (22).19 (5).45 Min. required return torque oz-in Catalog Number DT Stainless steel Cast aluminum _ 3SX3-KL31 _ 3SX3-KL536 _ 3SX3-KL58 3SX3-KL24 _ 3SX3-KL25 _ 3SX3-KL26 _ 3SX3-KL27 _ 3SX3-KL28 _ 3SX3-KL29 _ 3SX3-KL3 _ 3SX3-KL532 List Price $ 1 unit Precision adjustment 1.5 (38) Nylatron Ball bearing.75 (19).75 (19).69 (17).31 (8).31 (8).25 (6).65 1.2.9 3SX3-KL34 3SX3-KL465 3SX3-KL535 Adjustable roller 1 3.75 (25 95) 1 3.75 (25 95) 1.62 3.75 (41 95).5 3.75 (13 95) 1 3.75 (25 95).5 3.75 (13 95) Nylatron.75 (19) Nylatron.75 (19) Nylatron 1.5 (38) Large nylatron 4 (12) Ball bearing.69 (17) Without roller _.5 (13) 1 (25).28 (7).11 (3).25 (6) _ 1.9 3.1 2.5 4.5 2.5 1.2 3SX3-KL599 3SX3-KL537 3SX3-KL443 3SX3-KL598 3SX3-KL539 3SX3-KL31 Fork lever _ both rollers one side 1.5 (38) Nylatron Ball bearing.75 (19).75 (19).69 (17) 1 (25).31 (8).25 (6) _ 3SX3-KL543 3SX3-KL544 3SX3-KL545 Fork lever _ both rollers outside, one side 1.5 (38) Nylatron Ball bearing.75 (19).75 (19).69 (17).31 (8).31 (8).25 (6) _ 3SX3-KL23 3SX3-KL541 3SX3-KL542 Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions: Operator Adjustable rod Length Inches (mm) 5.5 (14) Max. 5.5 (14) Max. 8.75 (222) Max 12 (35) Max. Description Inches (mm) Nylon Rod.19 (5) Dia. Rod.12 (3) Dia. Rod (Square).12 (3) Max. Steel (Formable) Rod.12 (3) Dia. Clamp Only.19 (5) Hole Clamp Only.12 (3) Hole Min. required return force oz-in..4.92 2.2 5. Spring rod 11.62 (295) rod 2.8 DT Catalog Number 3SX3-KL399 3SX3-KL22 3SX3-KL581 3SX3-KL226 3SX3-KL35 3SX3-KL36 3SX3-KL421 List Price $ 1 unit Adjustable wire 12.12 (38) max. Nylon covered wire 1.5 3SX3-KL533 Adjustable wide roller lever 3.9 (99).75 (19) Dia. Nylatron Roller.19 (3) Dia. Rod 4.5 3SX3-KL37 Wobble head operators See dimensions page 13/76 Stainless steel rod _ Rod diameter -.6 (2) _ 3SX3-KW3 Length from operating shaft axis to the roller axis. Maximum dimensions, precision adjustable to lesser dimensions. By re-assembling lever minimum can be reduced by 1/2 in. Applies when lever extended to maximum dimension. Caution When selecting lever, required return torque should not exceed minimum return force in operating head. All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or construction purposes. Product Category: LIMT 13/69

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible Wiring diagrams Single Pole 1 NO - 1 NC Double Pole 1 NO - 1 NC Cable color code 1 - White 6 - Pink 2 - Black 7 - Yellow 3 - Red 8 - Blue 4 - Orange 9 - Green 5 - Brown Pre-wired cable Modular, plug-in and prewired cable Red/Blk 1 Grn/Blk 2 Orange 3 Blue 4 5 Wht/Blk 6 Red 7 Black 8 White 1 7 6 2 5 8 9 3 4 Green Gnd Prewired receptacle with pin connector Typical connector cable (supplied by user) Manufacturers part number Cable length ft. 5 Pin connector cable 3 6 12 9 Pin connector cable 3 6 12 Daniel Woodhead Brad Harrison 15A1F3 15A1F6 15A1F12 39A1F3 39A1F6 39A1F12 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 5111-3_ 5111-4_ 5111-5_ X899-3 X899-4 X899-5 Molex (Industrial Interface) 14541 14542 14544 _ Lumberg USA RK5-77/1M RK5-77/2M RK5-77/4M _ 13/7

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible Dimension drawings Plain side plunger Roller side plunger Two side plungers Plain top plunger Roller top plunger Rotary lever operators Dimensions Catalog Number A B C D E F 3SX3-KL2 1.5 (38.1) 3SX3-KL355 1.5 (38.1) 3SX3-KL377 1.5 (38.1) 3SX3-KL531 1.5 (38.1) 3SX3-KL546 2. (5.8) 3SX3-KL547 2.5 (63.5) 3SX3-KL548 3. (76.2) 3SX3-KL549 2. (5.8) 3SX3-KL55 2.5 (63.5) 3SX3-KL551 3. (76.2) 3SX3-KL552 2. (5.8) 3SX3-KL553 2.5 (63.5).75 (19.).75 (19.).75 (19.).688 (17.5).75 (19.).75 (19.).75 (19.).75 (19.).75 (19.).75 (19.).688 (17.5).688 (17.5).32 (8.1).32 (8.1) 1. (25.4).25 (6.4).32 (8.1).32 (8.1).32 (8.1).32 (8.1).32 (8.1).32 (8.1).25 (6.4).25 (6.4).44 (11.2).44 (11.2).44 (11.2).44 (11.2).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).2 (5.1).2 (5.1).9 (22.9).12 (3.).2 (5.1).2 (5.1).2 (5.1).2 (5.1).2 (5.1).2 (5.1).12 (3.).12 (3.).24 (6.1).24 (6.1).9 (22.9).18 (4.6).24 (6.1).24 (6.1) Dimensions Catalog Number A B C D E F 3SX3-KL554 3. (76.2) 3SX3-KL572 2. (5.8) 3SX3-KL573 2.5 (63.5) 3SX3-KL574 3. (76.2) 3SX3-KL575 2.5 (63.5) 3SX3-KL576 3. (76.2).688 (17.5.75 (19.).75 (19.).75 (19.) 1.5 (38.1) 1.5 (38.1).24 (6.1) With rollers on reverse side.24 (6.1).24 (6.1).24 (6.1).18 (4.6).18 (4.6) 3SX3-KL31 1.5 (38.1) 3SX3-KL536 1.5 (38.1) 3SX3-KL579 1.5 (38.1) 3SX3-KL58 1.5 (38.1).75 (19.) 1.5 (38.1).75 (19.).688 (17.5.25 (6.4) 1. (25.4) 1. (25.4) 1. (25.4).29 (7.4).29 (7.4).32 (8.1).28 (7.1).32 (8.1).25 (6.4).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).42 (1.7).44 (11.2).44 (11.2).44 (11.2).44 (11.2).12 (3.).9 (22.9.9 (22.9.9 (22.9.18 (4.6).18 (4.6).34 (8.6).3 (7.6).34 (8.6).25 (6.4).18 (4.6).9 (22.9.9 (22.9.9 (22.9.24 (6.1).24 (6.1).38 ((9.7).38 ((9.7).38 ((9.7).31 (7.9) All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purpose only. Not to be used for design or construction purposes. Can accommodate both U.S. 1.16 (29.4) x 2.34 (59.5) and DIN 1.18 (3.) x 2.36 (6.) mounting dimensions. 13/71

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible Dimension drawings Offset roller levers Catalog Dimensions Number A B C Outboard roller 3SX3-KL27.75 (19).32 (8).3 (1) 3SX3-KL28.75 (19).32 (8).3 (1) 3SX3-KL29.69 (18).25 (6).4 (1) 3SX3-KL3.75 (19) 1. (25) _ Inboard roller 3SX3-KL24.75 (19).32 (8).3 (1) 3SX3-KL25.75 (19).32 (8).3 (1) 3SX3-KL26.69 (18).25 (6).4 (1) Fork lever, one roller inside, one roller outside Dimensions Catalog Number A B C D E F 3SX3-KL23.75 (19) 3SX3-KL541.75 (19) 3SX3-KL542.69 (18).32 (8).32 (8).25 (6).16 (4).16 (4).8 (2).2 (5).2 (5).14 (4).73 (19).73 (19).64 (16).77 (2).77 (2).7 (18) Fork lever - Catalog Number 3SX3-KL24.75 (19) 3SX3-KL543.75 (19) 3SX3-KL544.75 (19) 3SX3-KL545.69 (18) Both rollers on one side Dimensions A B C D.32 (8) 1. (25).32 (8).25 (6).16 (4).86 (22).16 (4).8 (2).2 (5).86 (22).2 (5).1 (3) Bantam roller lever Precision adjustment roller lever Dimensions Dimensions Catalog Number A B C D E F Catalog Number A B C D 3SX3-KL34.69 (18).75 (19).32 (8).48 (12).24 (6).28 (7) 3SX3-KL21.75 (19).32 (8).29 (7).33 (8) 3SX3-KL465.69 (18).75 (19).32 (8).48 (12).24 (6).28 (7) 3SX3-KL443 1.5 (38).29 (7).26 (7).32 (8) 3SX3-KL535.69 (18).69 (18).25 (6).48 (12).16 (4).22 (6) 3SX3-KL537.75 (19).32 (8).29 (7).33 (8) 3SX3-KL538.69 (18).25 (6).21 (5).27 (7) 3SX3-KL539.69 (18).25 (6).21 (5).27 (7) 3SX3-KL598.39 (1).11 (3).11 (3).19 (5) 3SX3-KL599.75 (19).5 (13).46 (12).47 (12) All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or construction purposes. Adjustable roller lever 13/72

3SE3 North American Limit Switches Modular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible Dimension drawings Nylon Spring Rod Actuator 3SX3-KL556 Nylon Covered Wire Actuator 3SX3-KL533 Stainless Steel Spring Actuator 3SX3-KL421 Adjustable Rod Actuator Adjustable Wire Roller Actuator 3SX3-KL37 Nylatron Loop Actuator 3SX3-KL142 Adjustable rod actuators Dimensions Catalog Number Material A B 3SX3-KL22 Steel-Round 5.5 (14) 3SX3-KL581 Steel-Square 8.75 (222) 3SX3-KL399 Nylon 5.5 (14) 3SX3-KL22 Stainless Steel 9. (229) 3SX3-KL226 Plated Steel 12. (35).12 (3).125 (3).19 (5).19 (5) ).12 (3) Wobble head with nylon head 3SE3-DW1 3SX3-KW2 Wobble head with coil spring 3SE3-DW1 3SX3-KW4 Wobble head with stainless steel rod 3SE3-DW1 3SX3-KW3 All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or construction purposes. 13/73

3SE3 North American Limit Switches 3SE3 enclosure Description Features NEMA 1 Enclosed Aluminum Die Cast Housing Screw Terminals Booted versions for added protection 1/2" Conduit Entrance NEMA A6, R3 Contacts UL Recognized CSA Certified INO/INC Snap-action contacts (form c) Application These switches are designed for accurate repeatability. Their compact size makes them ideal for use in space-restricted areas. Typical applications include overhead, folding and elevator doors, sliding gates and other automated equipment. Overall dimensions Specifications DT Catalog Number Plunger actuator List Price $ 1 unit OF Max. - 8.82-12.3 oz. (25-35 g) RF Min. 4.2 oz. (114 g) PT Max. -.16 in. (.4 mm) OT Min. -.217 in. (5.5 mm) MD Max. -.2 in. (.5 mm) OP - 1.54 in. (38.2 mm) 3SE3 - EB5 Booted plunger OF Max. - 28.22 oz. (8 g) RF Min. 8.46 oz. (24 g) PT Max. -.79 in. (2. mm) OT Min. -.197 in. (5. mm) MD Max. -.4 in. (.1 mm) OP - 1.83 in. (45.8 mm) 3SE3 - EB6 Roller lever OF Max. - 2.1 oz. (57 g) RF Min. 6. oz. (17 g) PT Max. -.157 in. (4. mm) OT Min. -.236 in. (6. mm) MD Max. -.16 in. (.4 mm) 3SE3 - EB32 Booted roller lever OF Max. - 22.57 oz. (64 g) RF Min. 8.11 oz. (23 g) PT Max. -.197 in. (5. mm) OT Min. -.236 in. (6. mm) MD Max. -.16 in. (.4 mm) 3SE3 - EB33 OF = Operating Force RF = Return Force PT = Pretravel OT = Operating Travel MD = Movement Differential OP = Operating Position 13/74 Product Category: LIMT

3SE3 North American Limit Switches 3SE3 enclosure Dimension drawings Overall dimensions Specifications DT Catalog Number List Price $ 1 unit Roller plunger OF Max. - 9.92-12.3 oz. (25-35 g) RF Min. 4.2 oz. (114 g) PT Max. -.2 in. (.5 mm) OT Min. -.142 in. (3.6 mm) MD Max. -.2 in. (.5 mm) OP - 1.957 in. (49.7 mm) 3SE3 - EB7 Booted roller plunger OF Max. - 17.64 oz. (5 g) RF Min. 3.53 oz. (1 g) PT Max. -.39 in. (1. mm) OT Min. -.138 in. (3.5 mm) MD Max. -.6 in. (.12 mm) OP - 1.957 in. (49.7 mm) 3SE3 - EB8 Technical data Mechanical Life 3,, operations maximum Electrical Life 5, operations minimum Operating Speed.1 m/second to 1m/second Cable Entry 1/2" NPT Temperature Range -15 to 8 (5 to 176 F) Degree of Protection NEMA 1 Mounting Any Position NEMA Rating A6, R3 Non-Inductive Load (A) Inductive load (A) Rated Voltage (V) 1)2) Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor load Inrush current (A) NC-NO NO NC NC-NO NO NC NO NC 125 VAC 15 3 1.5 15 5 2.5 25 VAC 15 2.5 1.25 15 3 1.5 5 VAC 3 1.5.75 2.5 1.5.75 8 VDC 15 3 1.5 15 5 2.5 14 VDC 15 3 1.5 1 5 2.5 3 maximum 15 maximum 3 VDC 6 (2) 3 1.5 5 5 2.5 125 VDC.4.4.4.5.5.5 25 VDC.2.2.2.3.3.3 1) Inductive load has power factor of.4 minimum (AC) and a time of 7m/second (DC) 2) Lamp load has an inrush current of 6 times steady-state current. Product Category: LIMT 13/75

Mechanical Safety 3SE7 Cable-Operated Switches General Information Application Cable-operated switches are used for monitoring or for EMER- GENCY-STOP facilities on particularly endangered system sections. They are available with metal enclosures. As the effective range of a cableoperated switch is limited by the length of the pull-wire, large systems can also be protected. Cable-operated switches (requiring pulling at both ends) and conveyor belt unbalance trackers are used primarily for monitoring very long belt systems. Specifications Switches with latching for implementation in EMERGENCY- STOP equipment correspond to the EN 418 standard. Principle of operation The switch contacts of the cableoperated switches and the conveyor belt unbalance protection devices are positive opening. Cable-operated switches with one-side operation are held in free position by the pre-tension force on the turnbuckle. In the 3SE7 14, -15 and -16 cable-operated switches, both switching contacts are available for cable-break/cable pull signaling. The NO contact is used, for example, for signaling purposes. For switches with latching, with a pretensioned cable, the locking must be deactivated beforehand in order to return the switch to its free position. Technical data Type 3SE7 12 3SE7 15 3SE7 14 3SE7 141 3SE7 16 3SE7 31 Standards IEC 6947-5-1, EN 6947-5-1; IEC 624-1, EN 624-1; EN ISO 1385 Certifications UL / CSA Electrical design Contacts electrically isolated from each other Electrical loading at AC-15 AC 4 V, 6A AC 25 V, 2A AC 4 V, 6A minimum AC/DC 24 V, 1 ma Short circuit protection 6 A (Slow acting) Mechanical endurance > 1 x 1 6 operating cycles Contact material Fine silver Actuation By pulling or breaking of a rope (cable) Rope length, maximum Spacing between rope supports, maximum 1 m 2.5 m 25 m 3 m 5 m 5 m 75 m 1 ) 5 m 2 x 5 m 5 m Enclosure GDAL alloy, coated (color), dark black RAL 95 Cover Shock-resistant thermoplastic Degree of protection acc. To IEC 6529 IP65 IP67 1P65 Ambient temperature -25C to +7C Mounting Designed for M 5 Mounting space 3 mm and 4 mm Cable entry 2x(M2x1.5) 2x(M2x1.5) 1x(M16x1.5) 3x(M2x1.5) 2x(M25x1.5) Type of connection M3.5 screw connection; Self-lifting pressure plate terminals Travel diagrams 3SE7 12-2DD1 3SE7 14-1.F 3SE7 141-1EG1 3SE7 14-1.D. 13 14 21 22 NSC_6 45 Central position Central position Central position 3SE7 12-1BF, 3SE7 15-1BF 3SE7 16-1AE, 3SE7 31-1AE 3SE7 15-1.D, 3SE7 15-2DD Central position 5 mm 1 NSC_294a 5 3 3 Wire tension Interlock Central position Interlock Wire break Central position Central position Central position 1) 75 m cable length possible provided the ambient temperature range is strictly observed, otherwise, 5 m. 13/76

3SE7, 3SF2 Cable-Operated Mechanical Switches Safety SIRIUS 3SE7 Cable-Operated Switches 3SE7 metal enclosures Selection Selection and ordering data Version Wire length Contacts DT Order No. Price per m Cable-operated switches enclosures, IP65 1 (cover made of molded plastic) Without latching, only cable pull 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE7 12-2DD1 1 1 unit monitoring With latching and button reset 2 NC q A 3SE7 12-1BF 1 1 unit - With yellow lid 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE7 12-1BH 1 1 unit PS* 3SE7 12-1BH 3SE7 15-1BD 3SE7 15-1BH enclosures, IP65 25 (cover made of molded plastic), with alignment window Without latching 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE7 15-2DD 1 1 unit With latching and button reset 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE7 15-1BD 1 1 unit 2 NC q 3SE7 15-1BF 1 1 unit - With yellow lid 1 NO + 2 NC q 3SE7 15-1BH 1 1 unit With latching and key unlatching 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE7 15-1CD 1 1 unit enclosures, IP65 25 (cover made of molded plastic), with alignment window, with LED, red, 24 V DC Without latching 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE7 15-2DD4 1 1 unit With latching and button reset 1 NO + 1 NC q 3SE7 15-1BD4 1 1 unit 3SE7 15-1BD4 3SE7 14-1B. enclosures, IP65 5 (cover made of molded plastic) With latching and button reset 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE7 14-1BD 1 1 unit 2 NC q 3SE7 14-1BF 1 1 unit In addition with LED, red, 24 V DC 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE7 14-1BD4 1 1 unit With latching and key unlatching 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE7 14-1CD 1 1 unit enclosures, IP67 (cover made of molded plastic), with EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom, with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism 75 1 NO + 3 NC q 3SE7 141-1EG1 1 1 unit 3SE7 141-1EG1 enclosures, IP65 2 75 with actuation on both sides With latching and button reset 2 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE7 16-1AE 1 1 unit 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE7 16-1BD 1 1 unit In addition with LED, red, 24 V DC 2 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE7 16-1AE4 1 1 unit 13 3SE7 16-1AE q Positive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. Industrial Controls * You can Catalog order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate Product Category: SFTY Siemens IC 1 212 13/77 13/11

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE7 Cable-Operated Switches Selection Conveyor belt unbalance trackers Version Contacts DT Order No. Price per enclosures, IP65 With latching and button reset 2 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE7 31-1AE 1 1 unit In addition with LED, red, 24 V DC 2 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE7 31-1AE4 1 1 unit PS* 3SE7 31-1AE q Positive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. Accessories Configuration of the cable-operated switches Short lengths of wire up to 25 m Product Category: SFTY SIRIUS cable-operated switch 3SE7 12 3SE7 15 Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AC Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AC Turnbuckle M6 x 6 3SE7 95-1AB Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AC Wire, Ø4 mm 3SE7 91 Eyebolt M8 3SE7 92-1AB Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AC Eyebolt M8 3SE7 92-1AB NSC_288d Long lengths of wire up to 5 m SIRIUS cable-operated switch 3SE7 14 Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD Use of a tension spring is essential for lengths of wire 25 m. Turnbuckle M6 x 6 3SE7 95-1AB Wire clamp, Wire, simplex, Ø4 mm oval, 3SE7 91 Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD Wire roller, rotatable 3SE7 921-1AC Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Tension spring 35 N 3SE7 931-1AD Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD Eyebolt M1 3SE7 92-1AC NSC_289f Pulling from both sides up to 2 x 75 m Wire, Ø4 mm 3SE7 91 Tension spring up to 2 x 5 m: 3SE7 931-1AD up to 2 x 75 m: 3SE7 931-1AE Eyebolt M1 3SE7 92-1AC Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD Wire clamp, simplex,oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire roller, rotatable 3SE7 921-1AC Use of a tension spring is essential for lengths of wire 25 m. Turnbuckle M6 x 6 3SE7 95-1AB Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire roller, rotatable 3SE7 921-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD SIGUARD cable-operated switch 3SE7 16 Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire clamp, simplex, oval, Ø4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC Wire rollers, rotatable 3SE7 921-1AC Wire eye, Ø4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD Tension spring up to 2 x 5 m: 3SE7 931-1AD up to 2 x 75 m: 3SE7 931-1AE NSC_499e Note: Large temperature fluctuations require corresponding compensation springs. For reliable connection the PVC sheath must be removed from the clamping area of the steel trip-wire. Wire supports must be used at the recommended intervals. 13/78

3SE7, 3SF2 Cable-Operated Mechanical Switches Safety SIRIUS 3SE7 Cable-Operated Switches 3SE7 metalaccessories enclosures Version Wire length/ diameter DT Order No. Price per PS* Trip-wire with fixing Steel wires, with red plastic sheath, 1 m A 3SE7 91-3AA 1 1 unit Ø 4 mm 1) 15 m A 3SE7 91-3AB 1 1 unit 2 m 3SE7 91-3AC 1 1 unit 5 m A 3SE7 91-3AH 1 1 unit Wire clamps, galvanized white Oval 2 Ø 4 mm A 3SE7 941-1AC 1 1 unit Simplex (1 set = 4 units) 2 Ø 4 mm 3SE7 943-1AC 1 4 units Duplex (1 set = 4 units) 2 Ø 4 mm A 3SE7 944-1AC 1 4 units Single (1 set = 4 units) 2 Ø 4 mm A 3SE7 942-1AA 1 4 units Tension springs (zinc-plated) to maintain the counter tension 13 N A 3SE7 931-1AB 1 1 unit 35 N, for trip-wires up to 5 m 3SE7 931-1AD 1 1 unit > 35 N, for trip-wires up to 2 75 m 3SE7 931-1AE 1 1 unit Wire rollers for changing the direction of the wire, Ø 4 mm A 3SE7 921-1AC 1 1 unit rotatable Fixtures for the wire rollers (incl. fixing nuts) 3SE7 921-1AA 1 1 unit Wire eyes for changes in wire direction and improved power transmission at the fixing points (1 set = 4 units) Ø 4 mm 3SE7 93-1AD 1 4 units Eyebolts for fixing the wire Including M8 nut A 3SE7 92-1AB 1 1 unit Including M1 nut 3SE7 92-1AC 1 1 unit Turnbuckles for precise adjustment of the pretension M6 x 6 A 3SE7 95-1AB 1 1 unit M6 x 11 A 3SE7 95-1AD 1 1 unit Spare parts LED lamps, red 24 V DC 25 mm diameter; for M2 x 1.5 connection 1) Diameter including casing; the diameter of the steel wire is 3.2 mm. D 3SX3 235 1 1 unit 13 Industrial Controls * You can Catalog order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate Product Category: SFTY Siemens IC 1 212 13/79 13/13

3SE Mechanical Safety Cable-Operated Switches 3SE7, metal enclosures Dimension drawings enclosure 3SE7 12-2DD.., 3SE7 15-2DD.. without latching 3SE7 12-1B..., 3SE7 15-1B... with latching and button reset enclosure 3SE7 14-1B... with latching and button reset 3SE7 14-1ECD. with latching and key reset enclosure 3SE7 15-1CD.. with latching and key reset 3SE7 141-1EG1. with EMERGENCY STOP and Lockout release 3SE7 16-1AE.. with latching and button reset 3SE7 31-1AE.. conveyor belt unbalance protection device with latching and button reset 13/8 Product Category: LIMT

SIRIUS 3SE5, 3SE2 Mechanical Safety Switches Mechanical Safety With Separate Actuator 3SE5 Interlock Switches General data General data Overview SIRIUS 3SE5, 3SE2 Mechanical Safety Switches Position switches with separate actuator are used where the position of doors, covers or protective grills must be monitored for safety reasons. 3SE5 position switches with separate actuator have the same enclosures as the standard switches (modular system). Operation The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. For actuation from four directions it can be adjusted through 4 9. The switches can also be approached from above. The twist actuators of the 3SE2 243 and 3SE2 257 switches with special enclosures cannot be changed. The switches can be approached from the two broad sides and from above. The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the position switch and must be ordered separately from various versions to suit the application (see page 13/86). The actuator is encoded. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices is impossible. Radius actuators The position switches with radius actuators are particularly suitable for rotatable protective devices. The movable actuation key allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is prevented. Locking devices A high-grade steel blocking insert for attaching up to eight padlocks is available for even more safety (see page 13/86). 12 Position switches with head for separate actuator Design Enclosure sizes The 3SE5 switches are available in various enclosure sizes: Plastic enclosures according to EN 547, 31 mm wide, IP65, 1 cable entry enclosures according to EN 547, 31 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry Plastic and metal enclosures according to EN 541, 4 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry Plastic enclosures, 5 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 2 cable entries enclosures, 56 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 3 cable entries Also available is a switch in the 3SE2 series which has arisen in this form according to general market requirements: Molded-plastic enclosures outside of the standards, enclosure width 52 mm, IP67 Enclosure versions Various basic versions can be selected for the enclosures of the 3SE5 series: Available with two- or three-pole contact blocks designed as slow-action contacts Optional LED status display With mounted four- or five-pole M12 connector socket (available for the wide enclosures as an accessory for selfassembly) With 6-pole connector socket + PE on the metal enclosures Similarly with a combination of connector socket and LED indicators enclosures for explosion protection (ATEX) (see online) AS-Interface version with integrated ASIsafe electronics for all enclosure designs (see online) For a description of the basic switches, see page 13/6. Blocking insert with padlock Dust protection A rubber cap to protect the twist actuator from contamination is available for operation in dusty environments (see page 13/86). Contact reliability The new contact blocks ensure an extremely high contact stability. This applies even when the devices are switching low voltages and currents, e.g. 1 ma at 5 V DC. Positive opening q The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically, positively-driven and reliably by the plunger. This is referred to as positive opening. 12/54 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: LIMT 13/81

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures with separate actuator Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP65 or IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version 1) Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Order No. List Price $ per Enclosure width 31 mm to EN 547 5 directions of approach PS* PG Weight per approx. Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC -- q 3SE5 232-RV4 1 1 unit 12.15 Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q 3SE5 232-QV4 1 1 unit 12.155 kg With increased minimum pull-out force 3 N Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC -- q B 3SE5 232-QV4-1AA1 1 1 unit 12.15 With separate actuator With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (25 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC -- q B 3SE5 234-RV4-1AC4 1 1 unit 12.165 Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q B 3SE5 234-QV4-1AE 1 1 unit 12.17 With M12 socket With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 232-1RV4 1 1 unit 12.155 Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 232-3RV4 1 1 unit 12.11 With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q C 3SE5 234-1RV4-1AF3 1 1 unit 12.175 With 2 LEDs Enclosure width 5 mm 5 directions of approach Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q B 3SE5 242-QV4 1 1 unit 12.11 With increased minimum pull-out force 3 N Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC -- q B 3SE5 242-RV4-1AA1 1 1 unit 12.11 With separate actuator With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 242-1QV4 1 1 unit 12.12 Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q C 3SE5 242-3QV4 1 1 unit 12.12 With 2 LEDs q Positive opening according to IEC 694751, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 13/86). For 1/2 NPT adaptors and cable glands, see page 13/48. 13/82 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5, 3SE2 Mechanical Safety Switches Mechanical Safety With Separate Actuator 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 Version 1) Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 5 directions of approach Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-QV2 1 1 unit With separate actuator With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q C 3SE5 132-1QV2 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q C 3SE5 132-3QV2 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. q Positive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 13/86). 12 12/6 Siemens IC 1 212 Product Category: POSW 13/83 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Illustrations are approximate

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version 1) Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 5 directions of approach Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC q A 3SE5 212-RV4 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-QV4 1 1 unit With separate actuator With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 212-1RV4 1 1 unit Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 23 V AC q B 3SE5 212-3RV4 1 1 unit With 2 LEDs For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. q Positive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 13/86). 13/84 Product Category: POSW

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures with separate actuator Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version 1) Contacts LEDs DT Complete units Order No. List Price $ per Enclosure width 4 mm to EN 541 5 directions of approach PS* PG Weight per approx. Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q 3SE5 112-QV1 1 1 unit 12.36 kg With increased minimum pull-out force 3 N Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q B 3SE5 112-QV1-1AA7 1 1 unit 12.36 With separate actuator With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC -- q C 3SE5 114-RV1-1AC5 1 1 unit 12.36 Slow-action contacts 2 NC -- q C 3SE5 114-QV1-1AE1 1 1 unit 12.36 With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (25 V, 1 A) Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q C 3SE5 115-QV1-1AD1 1 1 unit 12.38 With M12 socket With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q B 3SE5 112-1QV1 1 1 unit 12.37 Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q C 3SE5 112-3QV1 1 1 unit 12.37 With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q C 3SE5 114-1RV1-1AF3 1 1 unit 12.36 With 2 LEDs With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (1 A) and 2 LEDs Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC q C 3SE5 115-1RV1-1AF2 1 1 unit 12.38 Enclosure width 56 mm 5 directions of approach Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q 3SE5 122-QV1 1 1 unit 12.36 With increased minimum pull-out force 3 N Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC -- q B 3SE5 122-QV1-1AA7 1 1 unit 12.36 With separate actuator With 2 LEDs, yellow/green Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC q 3SE5 122-1QV1 1 1 unit 12.37 Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 23 V AC q C 3SE5 122-3QV1 1 1 unit 12.37 With 2 LEDs q Positive opening according to IEC 694751, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 13/86). For 1/2 NPT adaptors and cable glands, see page 13/48. Product Category: POSW 13/85

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, metal and plastic enclosures Accessories Selection and ordering data Actuators for 3SE5 Version DT Order No. List Price $ per Standard actuators, length 75.6 mm PS* PG Weight per approx. kg A 3SE5 -AV1 1 1 unit 12.4 3SE5 -AV1 With vertical fixing, length 53 mm 3SE5 -AV2 1 1 unit 12.7 3SE5 -AV2 With transverse fixing, length 47 mm 3SE5 -AV3 1 1 unit 12.7 3SE5 -AV3 3SE5 -AV6 Radius actuators, length 51 mm Direction of approach from the left 3SE5 -AV4 1 1 unit 12.7 Direction of approach from the right A 3SE5 -AV6 1 1 unit 12.7 Universal radius actuators, length 77 mm 3SE5 -AV5 1 1 unit 12.9 3SE5 -AV5 Universal radius actuators, heavy-duty Length 67 mm A 3SE5 -AV7-1AK2 1 1 unit 12.12 Length 77 mm A 3SE5 -AV7 1 1 unit 12.9 3SE5 -AV7 Optional accessories for 3SE5 Protective caps made of black rubber for the actuator head, to protect the actuator openings from contamination Not to be used for 3SE5 2.. plastic enclosures. 3SE5 -AV8-1AA2 Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator head, for up to 8 padlocks B 3SE5 -AV8-1AA2 1 1 unit 12.1 B 3SE5 -AV8-1AA3 1 1 unit 12.65 3SE5 -AV8-1AA3 Connections for 3SE5, 3SE2 Connector sockets (4-pole), M12, fixed for M2 1.5 For max. 25 V, 4 A With.25 mm 2 connecting cable, plastic, degree of protection IP67, ambient temperature 4 to +85 C Cable boxes (4-pole), M12 With terminal compartment, can be preassembled Angular cable boxes (4-pole), M12 With terminal compartment, can be preassembled Connector sockets (5-pole), M12, fixed 3SY3 127 3RX8 for M2 1.5 For max. 125 V, 4 A With.25 mm 2 connecting cable, plastic, degree of protection IP67, ambient temperature 4 to +85 C Cable boxes (5-pole), M12 With terminal compartm., can be pre-assembled Angular cable boxes (5-pole), M12 3SX9 926 With terminal compartm., can be pre-assembled Cable glands M2 1.5 Plastic B 3SY3 127 1 1 unit 12.1 A 3RX8 -CB45 1 1 unit 574.15 A 3RX8 -CC45 1 1 unit 574.15 B 3SY3 128 1 1 unit 12.1 A 3RX8 -CB55 1 1 unit 574.16 A 3RX8 -CC55 1 1 unit 574.16 A 3SX9 926 1 1 unit 12.1 13/86 Product Category: POSW

Mechanical Safety 3SE2 Interlock Switches 3SE2, plastic enclosures with separate actuator Selection and ordering data 1 contact 3 contacts Moving double-break contacts 1 ) 2 ) Actuation Enclosure width Length of actuator DT 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Wght. with 3 slow-action contacts with 1 slow-action contact appr ox. 6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke Ident. No. 12 acc. to EN 5 13 Order No. List Price $ mm mm 1 unit kg Molded plastic enclosure IP 67 3SE2 243-XX Top and side entry 1 ) M2 x 1.5 connecting thread Wght. Ident. No. 1 appro acc. to EN 5 13 x. Order No. List Price $ 1 unit kg Extraction force 5 N 52 3SE2 243-XX4.14 3SE2 257-6XX4.12 Extraction force 3 N 52 3SE2 243-XX.14 3SE2 257-6XX.12 With automatic ejection 52 3SE2 243-XX3.14 3SE2 257-6XX3.12 M16 x 1.5 connecting thread Extraction force 5 N 52 3SE2 243-XX48.14 3SE2 257-6XX48.14 Extraction force 3 N 52 3SE2 243-XX18.14 3SE2 257-6XX18.14 With automatic ejection 52 3SE2 243-XX38.14 3SE2 257-6XX38.14 Actuators Standard actuator (r min. = 15 mm) 28 3SX3 218.2 Radius actuator (universal) (r min. = 45 mm) 33 3SX3 228.25 Ball catch (up to 1 N) 28 3SX3 217.35 Actuator with dust protector and slit cover (1 set) 34 3SX3 234.35 Radius actuator 82 3SX3 256.2 Accessories Slit cover only for 3SX3234 (1 set = 3 units) 3SX3 233.5 For operation, operating speed and travel, see Page 13/92. Positive opening acc. to IEC 6 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 66 Part 2. 1) Supplied without actuator. 2) For conduit thread adaptors, see page 13/48. Product Category: SFTY 13/87

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches Technical data Benefits The 3SE5 position switches with separate actuator differ from the previous series through the following new characteristics: All enclosure sizes with increased corrosion protection All enclosure sizes are optionally available with a LED signaling indicator. The three-pole contact block 1 NO + 2 NC is available for all enclosure sizes. The plastic enclosure has simple and fast wiring equipment which makes it possible to save from approx. 2 to 25 % of the time when connecting. The ASIsafe electric component is integrated for the versions with the AS-Interface connection (see online); an adapter is not required. Application Position switches with separate actuator are used where the position of doors, covers or protective grills must be monitored for safety reasons. The position switch can only be operated with the matching coded actuator. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices is impossible. Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. Dimensions, fixing points of the enclosure are in accordance with EN 541 or EN 547 standards. The devices are suitable for use in any climate. Standards IEC 6947-5-1 or EN 6947-5-1. The protective measure of "total insulation" by the molded-plastic enclosure is guaranteed by the use of molded-plastic screwglands. Safety position switches For controls according to IEC 624-1 or EN 624-1 the devices can be used as a safety position switch. To secure position switches against changes in their position, keyed techniques must be employed on installation. Safety circuits IEC 6947-5-1 and EN 6947-5-1 require positive opening of the NC contacts, i.e. for the purposes of personal safety, the assured opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to the IEC standard 6947-5-1 with the symbol q. Category 3 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) can be attained with a position switch with a separate actuator if the corresponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching units from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges. Category 4 can be achieved when using an additional position switch. Technical specifications Type 3SE5 1..-..V.., 3SE5 2..-..V.. 3SE2 257-.XX.. 3SE2 243-.XX.. General data Standards IEC 6947-5-1, EN 6947-5-1 Rated insulation voltage U i V 4 5 Pollution degree acc. to IEC 6664-1 Class 3 Class 3 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Rated operational voltage U e V 4 AC; over 3 V AC only equal potential 5 AC; over 38 V AC only equal potential Conventional thermal current th A 6 1 Rated operational current e 2-pole 3-pole 1-pole 3-pole With alternating current 5/6 Hz e / AC-15 e / AC-15 e / AC-12 e / AC-15 e / AC-12 e / AC-15 - At 24 V A 6 6 1 1 1 1 - At 12 V A 6 3 1 1 1 1 - At 24 V A 3 1.5 1 6 1 4 - At 4 V A 1 4 1 4 - At 5 V A 1 3 1 3 For direct current e / DC-13 - At 24 V A 3 e / DC-13 3 e / DC-12 1 e / DC-13 1 e / DC-12 1 e / DC-13 1 - At 125 V A.55.55 - At 25 V A.27.27 - At 11 V A 4 1 4 1 - At 22 V A 1.4 1.4 - At 44 V A.5.2.5.2 Short-circuit protection 1) With DIAZED fuse links, gg operational class A 6 6 With fuse links, quick 1 With miniature circuit breaker, Char. C A 1 2 Mechanical endurance 1 1 6 operating cycles Electrical endurance With 3RH.1, 3RT contactors in size S, S 1 1 6 operating cycles > 1 1 6 operating cycles For utilization category AC-15 when.1 1 6 operating cycles.5 1 6 operating cycles switching off e / AC-15 at 24 V Switching frequency 6 operating cycles/h With 3RH.1, 3RT contactors in size S, S Minimum pull-out force for positive opening N 2 1 3 13/88

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 with separate actuator and plastic enclosures Configuration Operation and operating travel of actuators Operation by a separate actuator Contact blocks Nominal travel q v max Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Max. actuating speed Direction of operation Terminal designation acc. to EN 513 Contact closed Contact open Actuator in actuator head: NC is closed Separate actuators Standard actuators Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation Axial actuation Axial and lateral actuation (4 9 ) 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5...-.RV.. 3SE5...-.RV.. 9 9 < 2 mm < 2 mm 9 22 14 21 13 Ident. No. 11 NSC_769 mm 1,7 2,5 2,4** NSC_921 ** 3 3 2,5 2,4 1,7 mm NSC_92 ** ** 9 NSC_892 Minimum force required in operating direction 3 N (on retraction) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5...-.QV.. 3SE5...-.QV.. 22 32 14 1,7 2,5 NSC_923 3 31-32 ** ** 21 31 13 mm 2,4** 3 Ident. No. 12 NSC_77 2,5 2,4 1,7 mm 31-32 ** NSC_922 ** ** Radius actuators (all directions of approach) Example: direction of approach from the left NSC_893 For connector assignment, see page 13/61. 13/89

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 with separate actuator and plastic enclosures Dimensional drawings Complete units Enclosure width 31 mm 3SE5 23.-.QV4, 3SE5 23.-.RV4 Enclosure width 5 mm 3SE5 24.-.QV4, 3SE5 24.-.RV4 25 Ø4,3 32,7 42 4 25 32,7 2,6 13 36 12,5 Ø4,3 2,6 36 2 22 31 4 68 M2x1,5 NSC_794 15 33 2 22 4 18,5 4,4 13 53 M2x1,5 5 5,5 12,5 NSC_795 15 33 Enclosure width 4 mm 3SE5 11.--.QV1, 3SE5 11.-.RV1 Enclosure width 56 mm 3SE5 12.-.QV1, 3SE5 12.-.RV1 32 36,5 32 36,5 2,6 12,5 32 2,6 13,5 32 16,3 6 16,3 4 Ø5,3 2 6 78 NSC_796a M2x1,5 Ø5,4 2 78 NSC_797 3 4,5 M2x1,5 15,3 37,3 56 5,5 15,3 37,8 Actuators 3SE5 -AV1 standard actuator 3SE5 -AV2 actuator with vertical fixing 3SE5 -AV3 actuator with horizontal fixing 9 9 Ø4,5 9 Ø4,5 NSC_781 31 75,6 Ø4,5 2 8 NSC_779 15 31 53 6 58 NSC_78 18 4 31 47 4 58 18 3SE5 -AV4 radius actuator, approach from left 3SE5 -AV6 radius actuator approach from right 3SE5 -AV5 universal radius actuator 9,6 22 9,6 22 Ø5,5 NSC_782a 31 31 3 NSC_783 51,1 68 Ø4,5 NSC_784 51,1 68 Ø4,5 31 4 77 39,5 5 28 4 5 28 4 5 13/9

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 with separate actuator and plastic enclosures 3SE5 -AV7 universal radius actuator, heavy duty 15 27,7 5 15 46 G_NSC_93 77 5 29 5,5 4 3 6 6 27,7 15 15 G_NSC_931 13/91

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE2 with separate actuator Plastic enclosures Configuration Operation and operating travel of actuators Operation by a separate actuator Contact blocks Nominal travel Minimum force required in operating v max Max. actuating speed Direction of operation Terminal designation acc. to EN 513 Contact closed Contact open direction on retraction Radius actuation: for all directions of approach Separate actuators Actuator in actuator head: NC is closed Standard and radius actuators Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation Axial and lateral actuation 1 NC 3SE2 257.XX.. R 15 *) min 22 2,3 5,5 8 11-12 mm NSC_275a 3 N or 5 N 3SE3 243: 9 mm 3SE3 257: 75 mm 3 NSC_273a *) Radius actuator: R min > 38 mm. Ident. No. 1 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE2 243.XX.. Ident. No. 12 2,3 5,2 5,5 8 31-32 mm NSC_274a 3 N or 5 N Dimensional drawings 3SE2 243, lateral and front-end actuation, with 3SX3 218 standard actuator 3SE2 257, lateral and front-end actuation 3SX3 228 universal radius actuator 56 5,5 for M5 tapping screw 4 28 56 4 16 9 25,5 2,5 2,8 8 29 18 7 Ø5,5 15,5 2,5 6,5 27 4 28 M2/M16 4 16 2 29 8 18 75 15,5 7 M2/M16 52 4 Ø5,5 NSC_383b 9 13 3 27 3SX3 217 actuator with ball locating 25,5 28,5 2,5 2,5 15 2 5,5 27 7 11 Ø5,5 56 4 1 NSC_381a 4,8 15,7 for M 5 tapping screw 8 14 4 52 NSC_38c 9 13 3 2,8 2,5 6,5 27 NSC_382a 13/92

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 / 3SE2 with solenoid locking General data Overview The position switches with solenoid interlocking are exceptional, technically safe devices which restrict and prevent an unforeseen or intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles or other covers as long as a dangerous situation is present (i. e. follow-on motion of the shutdown machine). The safety position switches with solenoid interlocking are comprised of a switch part with electromechanical interlock and a mechanical actuator which has to be ordered separately. They are rugged protective devices that enable the greatest possible safety for man and machine. The position switches with solenoid interlocking are offered in plastic or metal enclosures. Dimensions (W H D): 3SE5 3: 54 mm 185 mm 43.5 mm, 3SE2 8: 9 mm 1 mm (+ head 41.3 mm) 45 mm. Operation The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. For actuation from four directions it can be adjusted through 4 x 9. The 3SE5 3 switches can also be approached from above. The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the position switch and must be ordered separately from a choice of six versions to suit the application (see page 13/97). Actuation data: Maximum actuating speed v max = 1.5 m/s Minimum actuating speed v min =.4 mm/s Minimum force in the direction of actuation F min = 3 N The actuator is encoded. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices is impossible. Radius actuators The position switches with radius actuators are particularly suitable for rotatable protective devices. The movable actuation key allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is prevented. Locking devices A high-grade steel locking device for attaching up to eight padlocks is available for even more safety (see page 13/97). Dust protection A rubber cap to protect the actuator head from contamination is available for operation in dusty environments (see page 13/97). Solenoid interlocking There are two versions for locking the actuator: Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle) with various release mechanisms Magnetic field lock (open-circuit principle) The spring-actuated switch is equipped with an auxiliary release for emergency situations or setup mode. Available as options: Escape release or Emergency release Contact blocks The position switches with solenoid interlocking have one contact block each for: Monitoring the actuator or the position of the protective door Monitoring the position of the solenoid The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the requirements of the failsafe principle according to EN 188. Optical signaling equipment The position switches with solenoid interlocking are available with an optional optical signaling device. The signaling device indicates the switch position of the lock and the protective device optically by means of 2 LEDs on the front. Protective device Interlock Display Meaning Closed Released 1) 2) Actuator free to be pulled Closed Closed 2) Actuator locked Open Open 1) Actuator pulled Note: The voltage of the LEDs at the monitored contacts must be the same as the operational voltage of the solenoid (same potential). 1) Yellow LED. 2) Green LED. 13/93

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 / 3SE2 with solenoid locking General data Benefits The new generation of 3SE5 3 position switches offers: More safety through higher locking forces: - 13 N with plastic enclosure - 26 N with metal enclosure Various release mechanisms: lock release, escape release and emergency release Two contact blocks each with three contacts as standard equipment, hence fewer versions needed Same dimensions for all enclosure variants: Plastic, metal or with integrated ASIsafe An extensive range of actuators An optional LED status display 24 V DC, 115 V AC or 23 V AC for all switch variants Application The position switches with solenoid interlocking are exceptional, technically safe devices which restrict and prevent an unforeseen or intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles or other covers as long as a dangerous situation is present (i.e. follow-on motion of the shutdown machine). The safety position switches with solenoid interlocking have the following functions: Enabling the machine or process with closed and locked protective device Locking the machine or process with opened protective device Position monitoring of the protective device and solenoid Standards The switches comply with the standards IEC 6947-1 (Low-Voltage Controlgear, General) and IEC 6947-5-1 (Electromechanical Control Devices). The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the requirements of the failsafe principle according to EN 188. Approvals The switches are approved for use with locking devices according to EN 188 and EN 292, Parts 1 and 2. 3SE5 3 position switches with solenoid interlocking bear the VDE test mark for tested according to GS-ET19 (Test Principles of the German Trade Association for Locking Devices with Electromagnetic Interlocks). The 3SE2 8 metal-enclosed position switches with solenoid interlocking have been awarded a test certificate from the BIA (Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbeitssicherheit). Category 3 according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) can be attained with a position switch with solenoid interlocking if the corresponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e. g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching units from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges. Category 4 can be achieved when using an additional position switch. They are approved according to UL 58, UL 5 and UL 746-C. Solenoid interlocking The separate actuator operates in a similar way to the coding of a key and protects against manipulation. It transmits the locking force to the protective device and helps to monitor its position. There are two versions of locking: Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle) In the standard version, the position switch locks by means of spring force and releases by means of electromagnetic force. In the case of voltage failure, it reliably prevents the protective device from opening when machine parts are still moving. The switch is equipped with an auxiliary release for emergency situations or setup mode. An auxiliary release which can be secured with a lock to prevent misuse is available as a version. Auxiliary release Auxiliary release with lock The new 3SE5 3 position switches are also available with an escape release or an emergency release. Personnel working inside the hazard zone can use the escape release feature to manually release the interlock without tools from the escape side (hazardous area side) so that they can exit the hazard area. An intentional act (in this case pulling the gray actuator) is required to release the locking mechanism and restore the normal operating state. The emergency release enables someone in an emergency situation to manually release the interlock without tools from the access side (outside the hazardous area). Releasing the lock and restoring the normal operating state must require effort which is comparable to repair activity, in this case disassembly of the red actuator and resetting the mechanical lock. Escape release from the front Emergency release from the back Magnetic field lock (open-circuit principle) The second version offers locking by means of electromagnetic force and release by means of spring force. This version has an advantage when it is necessary to quickly access the machine after a power failure occurs, or in the case of very short overtravel times. 13/94

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures with locking force up to 12 N Selection and ordering data 6 slow-action contacts 5 directions of approach Cable entry 3 M2 1.5 Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Locking force 13 N (1 N according to GS-ET 19) Interlock 1) LEDs Solenoid Rated operational voltage DT Complete units Position monitoring: Actuators: 1 NO + 2 NC Solenoid: 1 NO + 2 NC Order No. Price $ per PS* PG Weight per approx. V kg 13 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm Spring-actuated locks With auxiliary release -- 24 DC q A 3SE5 322-SD21 1 1 unit 12.59 -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-SD22 1 1 unit 12.59 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-SD23 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 24 DC q A 3SE5 322-1SD21 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-2SD22 1 1 unit 12.59 3SE5 312-SD2. Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-3SD23 1 1 unit 12.59 With auxiliary release -- 24 DC q 3SE5 322-SE21 1 1 unit 12.745 With lock -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-SE22 1 1 unit 12.745 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-SE23 1 1 unit 12.745 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-1SE21 1 1 unit 12.745 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-2SE22 1 1 unit 12.745 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-3SE23 1 1 unit 12.745 3SE5 312-SE2. 3SE5 312-SF2. 3SE5 312-SG2. 3SE5 312-SJ2. 3SE5 312-SB2. With escape release from the front -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-SF21 1 1 unit 12.59 -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-SF22 1 1 unit 12.59 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-SF23 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-1SF21 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-2SF22 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-3SF23 1 1 unit 12.59 With escape release from the front and -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-SL21 1 1 unit 12.59 emergeny release from back For ambiant temperature -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-SL21-1AJ 1 1 unit 12.59 up to to 4 C With escape release -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-SG21 1 1 unit 12.59 from the back -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-SG22 1 1 unit 12.59 and auxiliary release from the front -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-SG23 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 24 DC q 3SE5 322-1SG21 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-2SG22 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-3SG23 1 1 unit 12.59 With escape release from the back and auxiliary release with lock from the front With emergency release from the back and auxiliary release from the front -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-SH21 1 1 unit 12.745 -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-SJ21 1 1 unit 12.745 -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-SJ22 1 1 unit 12.745 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-SJ23 1 1 unit 12.745 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 322-1SJ21 1 1 unit 12.745 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-2SJ22 1 1 unit 12.745 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-3SJ23 1 1 unit 12.745 Magnetic field locks -- 24 DC q 3SE5 322-SB21 1 1 unit 12.59 -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-SB22 1 1 unit 12.59 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-SB23 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 24 DC q A 3SE5 322-1SB21 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 322-2SB22 1 1 unit 12.59 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 322-3SB23 1 1 unit 12.59 q Positive opening according to IEC 694751, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 13/97). For 1/2 NPT adaptors and cable glands, see page 13/48. Product Category: POSW 13/95

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures with locking force up to 2 N Selection and ordering data 6 slow-action contacts 5 directions of approach Cable entry 3 M2 1.5 Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Locking force 26 N (2 N according to GS-ET 19) Interlock 1) LEDs Solenoid Rated operational voltage DT Complete units Position monitoring: Actuators: 1 NO + 2 NC Solenoid: 1 NO + 2 NC Order No. Price $ per PS* PG Weight per approx. V kg 26 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm Spring-actuated locks With auxiliary release -- 24 DC q 3SE5 312-SD11 1 1 unit 12 1.3 -- 115 AC q 3SE5 312-SD12 1 1 unit 12 1.3 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-SD13 1 1 unit 12 1.3 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-1SD11 1 1 unit 12 1.4 Yellow/Green 115 AC q 3SE5 312-2SD12 1 1 unit 12 1.4 3SE5 312-SD1. Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-3SD13 1 1 unit 12 1.4 With auxiliary release -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-SE11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 With lock -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-SE12 1 1 unit 12 1.18 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-SE13 1 1 unit 12 1.18 48 AC/DC q C 3SE5 312-SE14 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-1SE11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-2SE12 1 1 unit 12 1.18 3SE5 312-SE1. Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-3SE13 1 1 unit 12 1.18 With escape release -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-SF11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 from the front -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-SF12 1 1 unit 12 1.18 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-SF13 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-1SF11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-2SF12 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-3SF13 1 1 unit 12 1.18 3SE5 312-SF1. 3SE5 312-SG1. With escape release from the back and auxiliary release from the front With escape release from the back and auxiliary release with lock from the front With emergency release from the back and auxiliary release from the front -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-SG11 1 1 unit 12 1.175 -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-SG12 1 1 unit 12 1.175 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-SG13 1 1 unit 12 1.175 Yellow/Green 24 DC q 3SE5 312-1SG11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-2SG12 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-3SG13 1 1 unit 12 1.18 -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-SH11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 -- 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-SJ11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-SJ12 1 1 unit 12 1.18 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-SJ13 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-1SJ11 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-2SJ12 1 1 unit 12 1.18 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-3SJ13 1 1 unit 12 1.18 3SE5 312-SJ1. Magnetic field locks -- 24 DC q 3SE5 312-SB11 1 1 unit 12 1.3 -- 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-SB12 1 1 unit 12 1.3 -- 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-SB13 1 1 unit 12 1.3 Yellow/Green 24 DC q B 3SE5 312-1SB11 1 1 unit 12 1.4 Yellow/Green 115 AC q B 3SE5 312-2SB12 1 1 unit 12 1.4 Yellow/Green 23 AC q B 3SE5 312-3SB13 1 1 unit 12 1.4 3SE5 312-SB1. q Positive opening according to IEC 694751, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 13/97). For 1/2 NPT adaptors and cable glands, see page 13/48. 13/96 Product Category: POSW

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5, metal and plastic enclosures Accessories Selection and ordering data Actuators for 3SE5 1) Version DT Order No. List Price $ per Standard actuators, length 75.6 mm PS* PG Weight per approx. kg A 3SE5 -AV1 1 1 unit 12.4 3SE5 -AV1 With vertical fixing, length 53 mm A 3SE5 -AV2 1 1 unit 12.7 3SE5 -AV2 With transverse fixing, length 47 mm A 3SE5 -AV3 1 1 unit 12.7 3SE5 -AV3 3SE5 -AV4 Radius actuators, length 51 mm Direction of approach from the left A 3SE5 -AV4 1 1 unit 12.7 Direction of approach from the right A 3SE5 -AV6 1 1 unit 12.7 Universal radius actuators, Length 77 mm Length 77 mm, tab rotated 9 A 3SE5 -AV5 1 1 unit 12.9 A 3SE5 -AV5-1AA6 1 1 unit 12.9 3SE5 -AV5 Universal radius actuators, heavy-duty Length 67 mm A 3SE5 -AV7-1AK2 1 1 unit 12.12 Length 77 mm A 3SE5 -AV7 1 1 unit 12.9 3SE5 -AV7 Optional accessories for 3SE5 Protective caps made of black rubber for the actuator head, to protect the actuator openings from contamination B 3SE5 -AV8-1AA2 1 1 unit 12.1 3SE5 -AV8-1AA2 Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator head, for up to 8 padlocks B 3SE5 -AV8-1AA3 1 1 unit 12.65 3SE5 -AV8-1AA3 Connections for 3SE5, 3SE2 Connector sockets (4-pole), M12, fixed for M2 1.5 For max. 25 V, 4 A With.25 mm 2 connecting cable, plastic, degree of protection IP67, ambient temperature 4 to +85 C Cable boxes (4-pole), M12, non-adjustable With terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled Angular cable boxes (4-pole), M12 With terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled Connector sockets (5-pole), M12 3SY3 127 3RX8 for M2 1.5 For max. 125 V, 4 A With.25 mm 2 connecting cable, plastic, degree of protection IP67, ambient temperature 4 to +85 C Cable boxes (5-pole), M12 With terminal compartm., can be pre-assembled Angular cable boxes (5-pole), M12 3SX9 926 With terminal compartm., can be pre-assembled Cable glands M2 1.5 Plastic 1) See page 13/9 for dimensions drawings. B 3SY3 127 1 1 unit 12.1 A 3RX8 -CB45 1 1 unit 574.15 A 3RX8 -CC45 1 1 unit 574.15 B 3SY3 128 1 1 unit 12.1 A 3RX8 -CB55 1 1 unit 574.16 A 3RX8 -CC55 1 1 unit 574.16 A 3SX9 926 1 1 unit 12.1 Product Category: POSW 13/97

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 / 3SE2 with solenoid locking Technical specifications Type 3SE5 322 3SE5 312 3SE2 83, 3SE2 84 General data Standards IEC 6947-5-1, EN 6947-5-1 Rated insulation voltage U i V 25 Degree of pollution acc. to EN 6664-1 Class 3 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 4 6 Rated operational voltage U e DC V 24 24 AC 5/6 Hz V 23 11... 13 23 Conventional thermal current I th A 6 1 Rated operational current I e With alternating current 5/6 Hz I e /AC-15 or B3 I e /AC-12 I e /AC-15 - At 24 V A 6 1 4 - At 12 V A 3 1 4 - At 23 V A 1.5 1 4 For direct current I e /DC-13 or Q3 I e /DC-12 I e /DC-13 - At 24 V A 3 1 3 - At 6 V -- 5 1.5 - At 11 V -- 2.5.7 - At 125 V A.55 -- -- - At 22 V -- 1.3 - At 25 V A.27 -- -- Magnet Locking force, max. N 13 26 182 Locking force acc. to GS-ET 19 N 1 2 14 Power consumption at U c W 3.5 5.2 Short-circuit protection 1) With DIAZED fuse links, operational class gg A 6 6 Characteristic quick -- 1 With miniature circuit breaker, Char. C A.5 -- Mechanical endurance 1 1 6 operating cycles 1 1 6 operating cycles Electrical endurance With 3RH11, 3RT1 16 to 3RT1 26 contactors 1 1 6 operating cycles 1 1 6 operating cycles For AC-15 utilization category For DC-13 utilization category Switching frequency With 3RH11, 3RT1 16 to 3RT1 26 contactors 1 1 5 operating cycles, when interrupting I e /AC-15 at 23 V.5 1 6 operating cycles, when interrupting I e /AC-15 at 23 V With DC current the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching. No generally valid information can be given. 6 1 3 operating cycles/h Shock resistance acc. to IEC 668-2-27 3 g/11 ms -- Type 3SE5 322 3SE5 312 3SE2 83, 3SE2 84 Enclosure Enclosure material Ultramid A3X2G7 Zinc diecasting GD Zn Al4 Cu1 Aluminum (GD - AlSi 12) Degree of protection acc. to EN 6529 IP66/IP67 IP67 Ambient temperature During operation C 25... +6 3... +7 During storage, transport C 4... +8 -- Mounting position Any Connection Cable entry M 2 1.5 M 2 1.5 Conductor cross-sections Solid mm² 1 (.5... 1.5) 2 2.5 Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 (.5....75) 2 1.5 Protective conductor connection Inside enclosure -- M3.5 1) Without any welds according to IEC 6947-5-1. 13/98

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 with solenoid locking and plastic enclosures Schematics 3SE5 Monitoring the actuator: Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 12 22 34 11 21 33 NSC_279a Monitoring the solenoid: Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 42 52 64 41 51 63 NSC_349a Configuration Operation and operating travel of actuators Operation by a separate actuator Contact blocks Nominal travel q v max Positive opening acc. to EN 6947-5-1 Max. actuating speed Direction of operation Terminal designation acc. to EN 513 Contact closed Contact open Actuator in actuator head: NC is closed Separate actuators with solenoid interlocking Standard actuators Slow-action contacts Lateral actuation Axial actuation Axial and lateral actuation (4 9 ) 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5 3..-.S... 3SE5 3..-.S... 9 9 < 2 mm < 2 mm 9 12 22 34 NSC_279a 11 21 33 Ident. No. 12 1,7 2,5 mm 2,4** NSC_925 11-12 ** ** 33-34 3 3 2,5 2,4 1,7 mm 11-12 33-34 ** NSC_924 ** ** 9 NSC_892 Minimum force required in operating direction 3 N (on retraction) Radius actuators (all directions of approach) Example: Direction of approach from the left NSC_893 For connector socket assignment, see page 13/61. 13/99

SIRIUS 3SE5 Interlock Switches 3SE5 with solenoid locking and plastic enclosures Dimensional drawings Spring-actuated lock, with auxiliary release 3SE5 322-.SD2., 3SE5 322-.SG2., 3SE5 322-.SJ2., 3SE5 312-.SD1., 3SE5 312-.SG1., 3SE5 312-.SJ1., Spring-actuated lock, with auxiliary release with lock 3SE5 322-.SE2., 3SE5 312-.SE1. 32 39,1 2,9 32 39,1 2,9 25,1 25,1 159 3 4 135,3 19,3 33 Ø3 Ø5,3 18,9 159 3 4 135,3 19,3 33 Ø5,3 18,9 62,1 Ø31 M2x1,5 M2x1,5 31 4 54 5,5 21,5 16,3 43,8 94 NSC_771 31 4 54 5,5 21,5 16,3 43,8 87 NSC_772 Spring-actuated lock, with escape release 3SE5 322-.SF2., 3SE5 312-.SF1. Magnetic field lock 3SE5 322-.SB2., 3SE5 312-.SB1. 32 39,1 2,9 32 39,1 2,9 25,1 159 25,1 3 4 135,3 19,3 33 Ø5,3 18,9 Ø31 Ø3 159 3 4 135,3 19,3 33 Ø5,3 18,9 M2x1,5 M2x1,5 21,5 31 16,3 4 43,8 54 5,5 94 NSC_773 31 4 54 5,5 21,5 16,3 43,8 NSC_774 The plastic enclosures have knock-out openings behind behind the the connecting thread; they are delivered therefore without protective caps. For actuators see page 13/9. 13/1

SIRIUS 3SE5, 3SE2 Mechanical Safety Switches Mechanical Safety Hinge Switches SIRIUS 3SE5 Hinge Switches General data Overview 3SE5 hinge switches have the same enclosures as the standard switches (modular system). General data Benefits The 3SE5 hinge switches differ from the previous series through the following new characteristics: All actuators can be turned around the axis in increments of 22.5 (see picture on page 13/6). The new three-pole contact block 1 NO + 2 NC is available for all enclosure sizes (see picture on page 13/7). The plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm has simple and fast wiring equipment which makes it possible to save from approx. 2 to 25 % of the time when connecting (see picture on page 13/7). The ASIsafe electric component is integrated for the versions with the AS-Interface connection (see online); an additional adapter is not required. 12 Hinge switches Design Enclosure sizes The 3SE5 switches are available as complete units in two enclosure sizes: Plastic enclosures according to EN 547, 31 mm wide, IP65, 1 cable entry enclosures according to EN 547, 31 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry Plastic and metal enclosures according to EN 541, 4 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry Enclosure versions Various basic versions can be selected for the enclosures: Available with two or three-pole contact blocks designed as snap-action contacts enclosures for explosion protection (ATEX) (see online) AS-Interface version with integrated ASIsafe electronics for all enclosure designs (see online) For a description of the basic switches, see page 13/6. Operating mechanism The hinge switches are provided for mounting on hinges. The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. There are two versions: Operating mechanism with hollow shaft, inner diameter 8 mm, outer 12 mm Operating mechanism with solid shaft, diameter 1 mm Application The hinge switches are used in those areas where the position of swiveling protective devices such as doors or flaps must be monitored. With these switches, the position of the doors and hinge switches is converted into electric signals. The switches allow shutdown and signaling without delay in the event of a small opening angle through the snap-action contacts with an operating angle of 1. Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. Dimensions and fixing points of the enclosures are in accordance with EN 541 or EN 547 standards. The devices are suitable for use in any climate. Standards IEC 6947-5-1 or EN 6947-5-1. The protective measure of "total insulation" by the molded-plastic enclosure is guaranteed by the use of molded-plastic screwglands. Safety position switches For controls according to IEC 624-1 or EN 624-1 the devices can be used as a safety position switch. To secure position switches against changes in their position, keyed techniques must be employed on installation. Safety circuits IEC 6947-5-1 and EN 6947-5-1 require positive opening of the NC contacts, i.e. for the purposes of personal safety, the assured opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to IEC 6947-5-1 with the symbol q. Category 4 according to EN 954-1 can be attained with the 3SE5 hinge switches with q if the corresponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the 3TK28 safety relays or matching devices from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges. 12/72 Siemens IC 1 212 13/11

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Hinge Switches 3SE5, plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm / 4 mm Selection and ordering data Complete units 2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP67/IP68 (4 mm) Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Snap-action contacts DT Complete units Configurator PS* Order No. Price per Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 With hollow shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-HU21 1 1 unit Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LU21 1 1 unit With hollow shaft With solid shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 1 NC q B 3SE5 232-HU22 1 1 unit Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 232-LU22 1 1 unit With solid shaft Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 With hollow shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LU21 1 1 unit With hollow shaft With solid shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 132-LU22 1 1 unit With solid shaft For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. Spare parts Actuator heads Version DT Order No. Price per With hollow shaft Operating angle 1 B 3SE5 -AU21 1 1 unit PS* With hollow shaft With solid shaft Operating angle 1 B 3SE5 -AU22 1 1 unit With solid shaft Note: The respective actuators are included in the scope of supply for the complete units. 13/12 Product Category: POSW

SIRIUS 3SE5, 3SE2 Mechanical Mechanical Safety Switches Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Hinge Hinge Switches 3SE5, metal enclosures 3SE5, metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm / 4 mm Enclosure width 31 mm / 4 mm Selection and ordering data Complete units 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M2 1.5 Version Snap-action contacts DT Complete units Configurator Order No. Price per enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 547 With hollow shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LU21 1 With hollow shaft With solid shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 212-LU22 1 With solid shaft enclosures Enclosure width 4 mm acc. to EN 541 With hollow shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LU21 1 With hollow shaft With solid shaft Operating angle 1 1 NO + 2 NC q B 3SE5 112-LU22 1 With solid shaft For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators. qpositive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. Spare parts Version DT Order No. Price per Actuator heads With hollow shaft Operating angle 1 B 3SE5 -AU21 1 1 unit PS* 12 With hollow shaft With solid shaft Operating angle 1 B 3SE5 -AU22 1 1 unit With solid shaft Note: The respective actuators are included in the scope of supply for the complete units. * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. Industrial Controls Illustrations Catalog are approximate Product Category: POSW Siemens IC 1 212 13/13 12/75

Mechanical Safety 3SE2 Hinge Switches 3SE2, plastic enclosures with integrated hinge Overview The 3SE2 283 hinge switches are particularly suitable for use in doors and flaps of machines that must be closed to ensure the safety of operating personnel. Their thin profile and compact design allow them to be directly mounted on a hinged protective cover and the stable frame. Benefits Easy mounting through use of versions with integrated hinge Versions with small operating angle of 4 Protection against personal injury provided by positively driven NC contacts according to IEC 6947-5-1 Simultaneous shutdown and reporting by 1 NO + 2 NC contacts Selection and ordering data 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry 2 (M2 1.5) Version Slow-action contacts DT Complete units PS* PG Weight per approx. Order No. List Price $ per kg Plastic enclosures with integrated hinge With mounted hinges Slow-action (delivered with additional contacts hinge and fixing accessories) Aluminum hinge - Operating angle 4 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE2 283-GA43 1 1 unit 12.425 3SE2 283 - Operating angle 4 3 NC q A 3SE2 283-6GA43 1 1 unit 12.425 - Operating angle 8 1 NO + 2 NC q D 3SE2 283-GA53 1 1 unit 12.42 - Operating angle 8 3 NC q C 3SE2 283-6GA53 1 1 unit 12.42 High-grade steel hinge - Operating angle 4 1 NO + 2 NC q A 3SE2 283-GA44 1 1 unit 12.8 - Operating angle 4 3 NC q C 3SE2 283-6GA44 1 1 unit 12.8 q Positive opening according to IEC 6947-5-1, Appendix K. Accessories/spare parts Accessories Version DT Order No. List Price $ per PS* PG Weight per approx. kg Additional hinges (delivered with fixing accessories) Made of aluminum q D 3SX3 225 1 1 unit 12.16 Made of high-grade steel q D 3SX3 231 1 1 unit 12.33 3SX3 225 For 1/2 NPT adaptors and cable glands, see page 13/48. 13/14 Product Category: SFTY

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE5 Hinge Switches 3SE5, plastic and metal enclosures Configuration Contact blocks and operating travel of actuators Contact blocks Nominal travel Contact blocks Nominal travel Terminal designation acc. to EN 513 Hinge switches Contact closed Contact open Terminal designation acc. to EN 513 Snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE5...-HU2. 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE5..-LU2. 14 22 NSC_918 14 32 22 3 ** ** 13 21 1 2 13 31 21 Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 12 NSC_767 NSC_768 3 1 ** 2 NSC_919 31-32 ** ** Dimensional drawings Enclosure width 31 mm with hollow shaft 3SE5 212-.U21, 3SE5 232-.U21 Enclosure width 31 mm with solid shaft 3SE5 212-.U22, 3SE5 232-.U22 Ø4,3 24 52,8 47,8 39,8 Ø8 Ø12 Ø4,3 24 83,5 Ø1 2 22 4 13 68 12,5 NSC_811 7 5 M3 Ø2,9 2 22 4 13 68 12,5 NSC_812 7 31 M2x1,5 15 33 31 M2x1,5 15 33 Enclosure width 4 mm with hollow shaft 3SE5 112-.U21, 3SE5 132-.U21 Enclosure width 4 mm with solid shaft 3SE5 122-.U22, 3SE5 132-.U22 56,6 51,6 43,6 Ø8 Ø12 87,3 7 7 12,5 24 Ø1 12,5 24 16,3 M3 Ø2,9 51,6 16,3 Ø5,3 2 6 78 NSC_813a Ø5,3 2 6 78 NSC_814a 3 4,5 M2x1,5 15,3 37,3 3 4,5 M2x1,5 15,3 37,3 Product Category: POSW 13/15

Mechanical Safety 3SE2 Hinge Switches 3SE2, plastic enclosures with integrated hinge Overview The hinge switches are used for monitoring and protecting hinged protective devices such as doors and flaps. Characteristics Special design, with 2 M2 1.5 connecting thread Degree of protection IP65 3 contacts Operating angle of 4 or 8 Design The 3SE2 283 hinge switch has an integrated electromechanical contact block that is actuated when the hinged protective cover is opened. If the cover is opened by 4 or 8, the NC contact is positively opened by a direct (not spring-action) mechanism. These positively driven contacts guarantee interruption of the electric circuit and stopping of the machine. The NO contact is closed when the cover is moved by 13.5. Technical specifications Type 3SE2 283 Rated insulation voltage U i V 25 Conventional thermal current I th A 2.5 Rated operational current I e At AC-15, 12 V A 4.2 At AC-15, 25 V A 2 At DC-13, 24 V A 1 Min. make-break capacity > 5 V/1 ma Short-circuit protection Operational class gg A 2 Mechanical endurance > 1 1 6 operating cycles Switching frequency 12 operating cycles/hour Positive opening 2 mm after opening point Enclosure material Plastic Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature C 25... +65 Shock resistance 3 g/18 ms Resistance to vibrations 2 g /1... 2 Hz Cable entry 2 (M2 1.5) Screw terminals.5... 1.5 mm 2 /AWG 15 Configuration Contact blocks and operating travel of actuators (operating angle 4 ) Contact blocks Nominal travel Contact blocks Nominal travel Terminal designation acc. to EN 513 Hinge switches Contact closed Contact open Terminal designation acc. to EN 513 Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE2 283-GA4. 3 NC 3SE2 283-6GA4. 4 13,5 NSC_615a 11-12 11-12 33-34 31-32 NSC_614a 13 4 13,5 Ident. No. 12 Ident. No. 3 Dimensional drawings 3SE2 283-.GA.3 hinge switch with hinge 3SX3 225 additional hinge 13/16

SIRIUS 3SE6 Non-Contact Mechanical Safety Switches Safety SIRIUS 3SE6 RFID Non-Contact Safety Switches RFID 3SE63 RFID safety General switches data Overview Non-contact RFID safety switches with maximum tamper resistance 3SE63 RFID contactless safety switches meet the highest safety requirements, SIL3 or Cat. 4, for monitoring the positions of movable protective devices. An RFID safety switch consists of a coded RFID switch with an 8-pole M12 connector plug and an identical RFID actuator. The switch is available in several versions: Family coded with M12 plug or with additional 18 N magnetic catch as an option Individually coded, programmable once, with M12 plug or with additional 18 N magnetic catch as an option Individually coded, programmable more than once (an unlimited number of times), with M12 plug or version with additional 18 N magnetic catch The actuator is therefore available in two versions: Standard With 18 N magnetic catch The magnetic catch keeps doors and hinge switches closed with permanent magnets. Optional accessories Covers for sealing mounting holes, also suitable for tamperproofing screw fixings Spacers (approx. 3 mm high) to facilitate cleaning under the installation surface when using pressure washers, for example Mounting and maintenance Reduction in the number of versions, because switches can be mounted on right or left sides the actuator can be mounted on all sides Quick and easy mounting by thanks to universal mounting holes Standard gauge/holes for 3SE6 magnetically operated switch Fine adjustment thanks to slotted holes Little adjustment or maintenance required Threshold indication by LED on the switch for quick and easy adjustment during installation and maintenance Molded switch allows it to be used as an end stop for small and medium-sized doors Note: Keep metal parts and cuttings away from the vicinity of the switch Minimum distance between two switches 1 mm Coding Family coded These safety switches are delivered ready to use, i.e. no programming is necessary. Individually coded, programmable once The assignment of safety switch and actuator thus created is irreversible. The actuator is programmed simply by routine during startup, thus permanently preventing any form of tampering by means of a replacement actuator. Individually coded, programmable several times The procedure for programming a new actuator can be repeated an unlimited number of times. When a new actuator is programmed the previous code becomes invalid. A protected coding process allows new actuators to be programmed for service purposes. After this, a ten-minute lockout provides enhanced tamper protection. The green LED flashes until the lockout time has ended and the new actuator has been detected. If the operational voltage is interrupted during this time, the ten-minute guard time is restarted. Programming procedure for individual coding 1. Apply operational voltage to safety sensor 2. Move actuator into detecting range: red LED lights up, yellow LED flashes (1 Hz) 3. After 1 s it changes to a shorter flashing frequency (3 Hz). In this state switch off operational voltage. 4. After the next time the operational voltage is switched on, the actuator is detected again to activate the programmed actuator code. The activated code is thus stored permanently. Diagnostics The RFID safety switch indicates its operating state including faults by means of the LED indicator in the switch and the shortcircuit resistant diagnostic output. The signals can then be used for central displays or non-safety-related control tasks. There are two diagnostics functions: Crossover monitoring Open-circuit monitoring External voltage monitoring Ambient temperature too high Wrong or defective actuator Switching interval threshold identification with LED indication The signal combination "diagnostics output switched off" and "safety outputs still switched on" can be used to move the machine into a controlled stop position. Any crossover or a fault that is not currently compromising the safe operation of a safety switch results in the disconnection of the safety channels after a 3 minute delay. However, the diagnostics output switches off instantaneously. 12 Siemens IC 1 212 13/17 12/15

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE6 RFID Non-Contact Safety Switches General data Mode of operation of the diagnostics LEDs The safety switch indicates not only its operating state, but also faults by means of LEDs in three colors at the ends of the RFID switch. The green LED indicates readiness for operation when the control supply voltage is connected. The yellow LED indicates that there is an actuator in detecting range. If the actuator is in the switching interval threshold, this is indicated by flashing. This flashing can be used to identify a change in the distance between sensor and actuator at an early stage (e.g. as a result of the sagging of a protective door). The installation should be tested before the distance increases further, the safety outputs switch off and the machine stops. The red LED indicates the individual causes of the fault by means of defined flashing frequencies. Benefits Maximum tamper resistance by means of individual coding of switches and actuators at the highest safety level Plastic enclosure with integrated connector 2 electronic short-circuit proof safety outputs, each 25 ma Integrated crossover, open circuit and external voltage monitoring, with series circuit as far as the control cabinet Safety and diagnostics signals can be connected in series Series connection of safety circuits in Cat. 4 / PL e / SIL 3 LED status indication including switching interval threshold indication for quick and easy adjustment during installation and maintenance Short-circuit proof conventional diagnostics output Optional version with magnetic catch for interlocking hatches or small doors even when de-energized Highly rugged thanks to the use of tested enclosure materials, resistant to aggressive cleaning products, with a degree of protection of up to IP69K Fine adjustment thanks to slotted holes Little adjustment or maintenance required Molded switch allows it to be used as an end stop for small and medium-sized doors Application RFID contactless safety switches are designed for use in safety circuits, and are used to monitor the positions of movable protective devices. They monitor the positions of rotating, laterally sliding or removable protective devices using the coded electronic actuator. Their high degree of protection (IP69K) and the use of cleaning product-resistant materials means that these switches are optimized for use under extreme environmental conditions. Their electronic operating principle makes these switches ideal for metalworking machinery. The switches have a larger switching interval and switching displacement than mechanical switches, improve the mounting tolerance of the protective door, and offer a wide range of diagnostics options. The RFID switches can be connected to all standard evaluation units, e. g. a PLC, 3TK28 safety evaluation units (in which the built-in crossover monitoring function can be deactivated), or the 3RK3 modular safety system. The following safety categories can be achieved in safety circuits: Category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1) PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1 SIL 3 according to IEC 6158 Technical specifications Type 3SE6 3 General data Standards IEC 6947-5-3, IEC 6158, EN ISO 13849-1 Enclosure material Fiber-glass strengthened thermoplast, self-extinguishing Degree of protection IP69K Ambient temperature During operation C -25... +7 During storage, transport C -25... +85 Shock resistance 3 g/11 ms Vibration resistance 1... 55 Hz amplitude 1 mm Electrical specifications Rated insulation voltage U i V 32 Pollution degree acc. to IEC 6664-1 3 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp V 8 Rated conditional short-circuit current A 1 Rated operational voltage U e V DC 24 15/+1 % (PELV acc. to IEC 624-1) Protection class II Overvoltage category III Rated operational current e A.6 Smallest operational current m ma.5 No-load supply current ma 35 Type 3SE6 3 Inputs/outputs Safety inputs X1/X2 Input voltage V DC 24 15/+1 % Power consumption per input ma 5 Safety outputs OSSD1/OSSD2 p operation Max. rated operational current e A.25 Rated operational current e /DC-12/DC-13 at U e A.25 Voltage drop U e V < 1 Switching frequency Hz 1 Response time, max. ms 1 Risk time, max. ms 2 Recovery, max. s 5 Diagnostics ouput p operation Max. rated operational current e2 max A.5 Rated operational current e /DC-12/DC-13 at U e A.5 Voltage drop U e V < 2 Operational current ma 15 Conductor capacity, max. nf 5 13/18

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS SIRIUS 3SE6 3SE6 Non-Contact RFID Non-Contact Safety Switches Safety Switches RFID Directions of approach and switching interval The side area permits a maximum height offset of the switch and actuator of ±8 mm (e.g. mounting tolerance or due to sagging of the protective door). The transverse offset also equals max. ±8 mm. max. 18 mm max. 8 mm S ao S ar Connector assignment 3 4 2 IC1_9 5 8 Dimensional drawings 1 RFID switches 3SE6 315 6 7 Technical data 3SE63 RFID safety switches Pin 1: A1 rated operational voltage 24 V DC Pin 2: X1 safety input 24 V DC Pin 3: A2 grounding Pin 4: OSSD1 safety output Pin 5: OUT conventional diagnostics output Pin 6: X2 safety input 24 V DC Pin 7: OSSD2 safety output Pin 8: Not used IC1_86 A 9 4,5 22 6,2 S n S ao < 1 mm S n = 12 mm S ar > 16 mm 2 mm OSSD1 / OSSD2 1 S OFF S ON S OFF S 78 74 2 A-A IC1_88 Switching interval: output signal with hysteresis 18,5 25 M 12 x 1 RFID actuator 3SE6 31 A IC1_87 A 6,2 A-A X U (OSSD1/ OSSD2) x > S ar > 16 mm 9 4,5 IC1_89 24 V 25 22 12 A 91 78 < 2 ms t Switching interval: Output signal Siemens IC 1 212 13/19 12/17

Mechanical Safety SIRIUS 3SE6 RFID Non-Contact Safety Switches Selection Selection and ordering data With M12 connector, 8-pole Version/coding Latching / length DT Order No. Price per PS* Rectangular safety switches 91 mm x 25 mm RFID safety switches Family coded None 3SE6 315-BB1 1 1 unit Individually coded, programmable several times Individually coded, programmable once With 18 N magnetic catch 3SE6 315-1BB1 1 1 unit None 3SE6 315-BB2 1 1 unit With 18 N magnetic catch 3SE6 315-1BB2 1 1 unit None 3SE6 315-BB3 1 1 unit With 18 N magnetic catch 3SE6 315-1BB3 1 1 unit 3SE6 315 RFID actuators Standard None 3SE6 31-BC1 1 1 unit With 18 N magnetic catch 3SE6 31-1BC1 1 1 unit 3SE6 31 Optional accessories Covers and spacers One pack (1 unit) contains 8 covers and 4 spacers A 3SX5 6-1G 1 1 unit 3SX5 6-1G Connecting cables, 8-pole, with 1 straight M12 socket Rated voltage 3 V Rated current 2 A Length 3 m A 3SX5 61-2GA3 1 1 unit Length 5 m A 3SX5 61-2GA5 1 1 unit Length 1 m A 3SX5 61-2GA1 1 1 unit 3SX5 61-2GA For monitoring units see Chapter 14, "Industrial Communication" 13/11

SIRIUS 3SE6 Non-Contact Mechanical Safety Switches Safety 3SE6 Magnetic Monitoring Systems Magnet 3SE6 6, 3SE6 7 magnetically operated General switches data Overview NSC_637a 2 4 5 5,5 6 3 4 5 5 5,5 4 6 3 2 1 Switching magnets and contact blocks A magnetically operated switch is comprised of a coded switching magnet and a contact block (sensor unit). Evaluation requires a safety relay or connection to a bus system. 3SE6 86 safety relays Up to six protective devices (sensors) can be connected to the safety relay. Enabling range (example) The device has six current-sourcing semiconductor outputs (Y1... Y6) which signal the state of the connected protective devices. The 3SE6 86 safety relay has two floating enabling circuits (safe circuits) as NO contact circuits and one floating signaling circuit as a NC circuit. The number of enabling circuits can be increased by adding one or more 3TK28 3 expansion modules. Application SIRIUS 3SE6 magnetically operated switches are designed for A magnetic monitoring system comprises one or more magnetically operated switches and an evaluation unit, e.g. a safety re- mounting on movable protective guards (hoods, hinge switches, doors, etc.). Evaluation can be performed by means of a safety lay. When contact blocks 1 NO + 1 NC are used the 3SE6 86 relay or through connection to a bus system. safety relay provides a high degree of protection against manipulation and can be installed in safety circuits up to Category 3 The 3SE6 6 non-contact, magnetically operated safety switches according to ISO 13849-1 (EN 954-1). stand out due to their enclosed design with degree of protection IP67. They are particularly suitable therefore for areas exposed to contamination, cleaning or disinfecting. Combination of monitoring units and magnetically operated switches Monitoring units Magnetically operated switches (contact block + switching magnet) Achievable category 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 1 NO + 2 NC (EN 954-1)/ Performance level 3SE6 65-1BA 3SE6 65-2BA 3SE6 65-3BA 3SE6 64-2BA 3SE6 66-3BA (EN ISO 13849-1) 3SE6 74-1BA 3SE6 74-2BA 3SE6 74-3BA 3SE6 74-2BA 3SE6 74-3BA Relay outputs SIRIUS safety relays, 6-fold 3SE6 86-2CD Cat. 3 SIRIUS safety relays 3TK28 2 Cat. 4/e 3TK28 26 Cat. 4/e Solid-state outputs SIRIUS safety relays 3TK28 4 Cat. 3/d 3TK28 41, 3TK28 42, 3TK28 45 Cat. 4/e SIRIUS safety relays with contactor relay ASIsafe compact safety modules SIMATIC S7-31xF-2 DP or SIMATIC ET 2M SIMATIC ET 2S PROFIsafe 3TK28 5, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 52 Cat. 3/d 3TK28 53 Cat. 4/e 3RK1 25, 3RK1 45 Cat. 4 SM 326 F, 24 DI, 24 V DC, SM 326 F, 8 DI, NAMUR SIMATIC ET 2eco 4/8 F DI, 24 V DC Cat. 4 SIMATIC ET 2pro 8/16 F-DI, 24 V DC, Cat. 4 4/8 F-DI / 4 F-DO 2 A, 24 V DC, F-Switch Modular Safety System 3RK3 Cat. 4/e Suitable magnetically operated switch Cat. 4 4/8 F-DI / 3 F-DO, 24 V DC Cat. 3 4/8 F DI, 24 V DC Cat. 4 12 Siemens IC 1 212 13/111 12/13

Mechanical Safety 3SE6 Magnetic Monitoring Systems Selection Selection and ordering data Design Size S an... S ab Contacts DT Order No. List Price $ mm mm 1 unit Round sensor unit. IP67 3SE6 74-1BA 3SE6 65-1BA Switching magnet (coded) M 3 3SE6 74-1BA.35 Switch block with M 3 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE6 65-1BA.166 3 m cable Weight approx. kg Rectangular sensor unit. IP67 3SE6 65-2BA, 3SE6 74-2BA 3SE6 65-3BA, 3SE6 74-3BA Switch block with M12, 4-pole male receptacle 1) Switching magnet (coded) M 3 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE6 65-1BA2.13 25 88 3SE6 74-2BA.27 Switch block with 1 m cable Switch block with M8 male receptacle 25 88 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 25 88 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC 2 NC 3SE6 65-2BA 3SE6 64-2BA 3SE6 65-2BA1 3SE6 64-2BA1.165.165.4.13 Switching 25 x 33 3SE6 74-3BA.14 magnet (coded) Switch block with 3 m cable 25 x 33 4 to 14 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE6 65-3BA.151 with 3 m cable 25 x 33 4 to 14 1 NO + 2 NC 3SE6 66-3BA.151 Accessories 3SX3 26 3SX3 261 Spacer for rectangular sensor unit Spacer for rectangular sensor unit 25 88 3SX3 26.15 25 33 3SX3 261.1 Monitoring units 3SE6 86-2CD Rated control supply voltage Width Enable circuits/ signal. circuits Max. number of connectable sensors Order No. List Price $ DC V mm 1 unit 24 2 NO / 1 NC 6 1 NO + 1 NC Weight approx. kg 3SE6 86-2CD.2 1) Pin 1 (S21) + Pin 2 (S22) = Normally Closed; Pin 3 (S13) + Pin 4 (S14) = Normally Open Typical 4-pole Female Plugs with black 5 meter cable include: 3RX1542 (right-angle) or 3RX1513 (straight plug). 13/112 Product Category: SFTY

Mechanical Safety 3SE6 Magnetic Monitoring Systems General data Technical specifications Magnet Switches Type 3SE6 6.-1BA 3SE6 6.-2BA 3SE6 6.-3BA Form M3, 25 mm x 88 mm 25 mm x 33 mm Standards DIN EN 5947-5-3 3 ) Sensing type Magnetic Rated voltage AC/DC 1 V, 12 V DC 24 V Rated current 4 ma 1 ma Performance 1 VA/W 1 W Max. switching frequency 5 Hz Max. sensing distance S an... S ab 5... 15 mm 4... 14 mm Housing material Fiber-glass strengthened with glass fiber Degree of protection acc. to IEC IP67 6529 Permissible ambient temperature Operating 25 to +7 C Storage 25 to +7 C Shock resistance 1 g/11ms Vibration resistance 1... 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude Cable LiYY 4 x.25 mm 2 Conductor 3 m length Receptacle, male M12, M8 - Cable length (max for connecting to monitoring unit) 1 m 1 m Magnet Switch Monitoring Unit Type 3SE6 86-2CD Standards EN ISO 13849-1, EN 188 Rated control supply voltage U c DC 24 V Rated control supply voltage tolerance.85... 1.2 x U s Rated power (without signal outputs Y1... Y6) 3 W Maximum load current Signaling circuit Y1... Y6 2 ma Signaling circuit 31, 32 2 A Inputs 6 sensors (1 NO or 1 NC) Outputs 6 signaling outputs 1 relay output 2 enabling circuits Response time Automatic start 15 ms typical Manual start 25 ms typical Release time 2 ms max. Recovery time 35 ms Degree of protection to IEC 6529 IP2 Switching capacity 1 ) Release circuits (13, 14 and 23, 24) Continuous current, I th 6 A Rated operational current, I 2 e ) AC-15 @ 23 V 6 A DC-13-24 V 6 A - 115 V.2 A - 23 V.1 A Short circuit protection Fuse type DIAZED Duty class - gl(gc) 6 A - Quick response 1 A Permissible ambient temperature, T u Operating 25 to +45 C Storage 25 to +7 C 1) Utilization category per DIN VDE 66, Part 2, IEC 6947-5-1 2) With all release circuits loaded 3) In combination with monitoring unit or AS-Interface. 13/113

Mechanical Safety 3SE6 Magnetic Monitoring Systems Dimensional drawings Dimension drawings Round sensor units Switch block 3SE6 65-1BA Switch block 3SE6 65-1BA2 Coded switching magnet 3SE6 74-1BA 36,2 31,6 5 SW 36 M3x1,5 1,5 48,2 NSC_664 M12x1 Rectangular sensor units Switch block 3SE6 65-2BA Switch block 3SE6 6.-2BA. Switch block 3SE7 74-2BA 3SX3 26 spacer,5 78 88 Ø5 3,5 4,5 NSC_669 M 1,5 7 25 3 13 Switching magnet without lead Switch block 3SE6 65-3BA Coded switching magnet 3SE6 74-3BA 3SX3 261 spacer Monitoring unit Magnet Switch Monitor 3SE6 86-2CD 45 5 7,5 12 15 86 6 88 1 9 NSC_666 13/114

Mechanical Safety 3SE6 Magnetic Monitoring Systems Technical data Circuit diagrams Connection example Single Channel Control, Manual Start, Category 3 to EN ISO 13849-1 Six Channel Control. Automatic Start, Category 3 to EN ISO 13849-1 Terminal Assignments Power A1+, L+ U s Sensors S73, S74 Channel 1+2, NO contact (parallel) A2-, L- 24 V DC (Cont.) S83, S84 Channel 3+4, NO contact (parallel) Sensors S11, S12 Channel 1, NC contact S93, S94 Channel 5+6, NO contact (parallel) S11, S22 Channel 2, NC contact Outputs 13, 14 Release circuit 1 (safety NO contact) S31, S32 Channel 3, NC contact 23, 24 Release circuit 2 (safety NO contact) S31, S42 Channel 4, NC contact 31, 32 Floating signaling circuit S51, S52 Channel 5, NC contact Y1 to Y6 Status of Channels 1 through 6 S51, S62 Channel 6, NC contact 3SE6 64-2BA magnetically operated switch with 3TK28 safety relay, Category 4 to EN ISO 13849-1 3SE6 64-2BA magnetically operated switch on AS-Interface Safety at Work, safe K45F or K6F compact module, Category 4 to EN ISO 13849-1 L+ BU/S12 BK/S11 A1 Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34 Y35 Y21 Y22 A2 14 24 Switch block connection BK 11 WH 21 NSC_64a 12 BU 22 BN M WH/S21 BN/S22 K1 K2 NSC_638a The specified switching position refers to the basic position when the cover, flap etc. is closed. Abbrevitions for color designation of the connecting leads acc. to IEC 6757: BK = black BN = brown BL = blue WH = white 13/115

Mechanical Safety 3SB3 Two-Hand Control Selection Application Two-hand operation consoles are required for use with machines and systems that have hazardous areas, in order to direct both hands of the operator to one position. Construction Equipment All consoles are pre-equipped with SIGNUM 3SB3 control devices. The metal version is also available as an unequipped empty enclosure. Principle of operation The control command is given by pressing the two operating elements simultaneously (within Selection and ordering data Operation consoles are primarily used on presses, stamping machines, printing presses and paper converting machines, in the chemical industry and in the rubber and plastics industries. The plastic version can be retrofitted with up to 8 command points, in line with the customer s requirements. The surface of the console has premachined breaking points for this purpose..5 s of each other) and must be maintained for as long as a hazard exists. Specifications Two-hand operation consoles fulfill the requirements laid down in DIN 24 98 and EN 574. Installation The two-hand operation consoles can be mounted either on the stand available or directly on the machine by means of the holes in the rear panel. 3SB38 63-4BB Design DT Order No. List Price $ 1 unit SIGUARD two-hand operation console Degree of protection IP 65, acc. to DIN 24 98 (EN 574), Standard equipment with 2 black operating elements (mushroom button 3SB3-1GA11, Ø 4 mm, 1 NO + 1 NC) and a red EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button 3SB3-1HA2, latching Ø 4 mm, 2 NC version Weight approx. - with standard equipment 3SB38 63-4BB 4.8 - with standard equipment and 4 additional holes for control devices 22.5 mm kg 3SB38 63-4BA 4.8 3SB39 1 AQ - empty enclosure, unequipped 3SB38 63-4BC 4.8 Plastic version - with standard equipment and predeterminated breaking points for 8 further command points 22.5 mm - with cable inlet holes for metric screwed cable glands 3SB38 63-1BB3 2.3 Stand for SIGUARD two-hand operation consoles with cable inlet holes for metric screwed cable glands 3SB39 1-AQ3 4.5 Dimension drawings 3SB38 63-4 operator panel with metal enclosure 3SB39 1-AQ stand 22 Ø11,5 137 13 185 41 469 NSD_148 Note: Also available with AS-Interface connection, contact your local Siemens representative. 13/116 Product Category: SFTY